Nissan Automobile SIC0697 User Manual

Foreword

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN

owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with

confidence. It was produced using the latest

techniques and strict quality control.

tenance requirements, assisting you in the

safe operation of your vehicle.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified. Modi-

fication could affect its performance,

safety or durability, and may even violate

governmental regulations. In addition,

damage or performance problems result-

ing from modification may not be covered

under NISSAN warranties.

WARNING

This manual was prepared to help you under-

stand the operation and maintenance of your

vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles of

driving pleasure. Please read through this

manual before operating your vehicle.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMA-

TION

REMINDERS FOR SAFETY!

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

Follow these important driving rules to

help ensure a safe and comfortable trip

for you and your passengers!

A separate Warranty Information Booklet

explains details about the warranties cov-

ering your vehicle. The NISSAN Service

and Maintenance Guide explains details

about maintaining and servicing your ve-

hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer

Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will

explain how to resolve any concerns you

may have with your vehicle, as well as

clarify your rights under your state’s lemon

law.

This manual includes information for all

options available on this model. There-

fore, you may find some information that

does not apply to your vehicle.

Never drive under the influence of

alcohol or drugs.

All information, specifications and illustrations in

this manual are those in effect at the time of

printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change

specifications or design at any time without

notice.

Always observe posted speed limits

and never drive too fast for condi-

tions.

Always use your seat belts. Refer to

“Child safety” and “Child restraints”

in the “Seats, restraints and supple-

mental air bag systems” section for

precautions regarding children.

Your NISSAN dealer knows your vehicle best.

When you require any service or have any

questions, we will be glad to assist you with the

extensive resources available for you.

Always provide information about the

proper use of vehicle safety features

to all occupants of the vehicle.

READ FIRST — THENDRIVE

SAFELY

Always review this Owner’s Manual

for important safety information.

Before driving your vehicle please read

your Owner’s Manual carefully. This will

ensure familiarity with controls and main-

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Welcome To The World Of NISSAN

to the supply of lubricants, parts and accessories.

NISSAN pioneered the use of electronics and

computers in automobiles, and has led the industry

in improving both performance and fuel efficiency

through new engine designs and the use of syn-

thetic materials to reduce vehicle weight. The

company has also developed ways to build quality

into its vehicles at each stage of the production

process, both through extensive use of automation

and — most importantly — through an awareness

that people are the central element in quality

control.

From the time the parts arrived from our suppliers

until you took delivery of your new Nissan, dozens

of checks were made to ensure that only the best

jobwas being done in producing and delivering

your vehicle. NISSAN also takes great care to

ensure that when you take your NISSAN to your

dealer for maintenance, the service technician will

perform his work according to the quality stan-

dards that have been established by the factory.

WFW0002

Your new NISSAN is the result of our dedication to

produce the finest in safe, reliable and economical

transportation. Your vehicle is the product of a

successful worldwide company that manufactures

cars and trucks in over 17 countries and distributes

them in 170 nations.

the facilities include the Nissan Manufacturing

facility in Smyrna, Tennessee, vehicle styling de-

sign at Nissan Design America in San Diego,

California, and engineering at Nissan Technical

Center North America in Farmington Hills, Michi-

gan. Additionally, NISSAN employs nearly 18,000

people throughout the United States, Canada, and

Mexico. An additional 71,000 people work for the

1,500 NISSAN and INFINITI dealers across North

America.

Safety has also been built into your NISSAN. As

you know, seat belts are an integral part of the

safety systems that will help protect you and your

passengers in the event of a sudden stop or an

accident. We urge you to use the seat belts every

time you drive the vehicle.

NISSAN vehicles are designed and manufactured

by Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. which was founded in

Tokyo, Japan in 1933, and NISSAN affiliates world

wide, collectively growing to become the fifth

largest automaker in the world. In addition to cars

and trucks, NISSAN also makes forklift trucks,

marine engines, boats and other diversified prod-

ucts.

NISSAN is also a substantial contributor to the

Canadian economy. Nissan Canada Inc., its sup-

pliers and over 140 dealers employ approximately

4,500 people. These include company employees

and the staffs of NISSAN dealers all across

Canada. In addition, many Canadians work for

companies that supply NISSAN and NISSAN deal-

ers with materials and services ranging from op-

eration of port facilities and transportation services

The NISSAN story of growth and achievement

reflects our major goal: to provide you, our cus-

tomer, with a vehicle that is built with quality and

craftsmanship — a product that we can be proud

to build and you can be proud to own.

NISSAN has made a substantial and growing

investment in North America. NISSAN’S commit-

ment is nearly $4 billion dollars in capital invest-

ments in facilities across the continent. Some of

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

NISSAN CARES ...

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer

are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your

NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you

would like to provide NISSAN directly with

comments or questions, please contact our

(NISSAN’s) Consumer Affairs Department us-

ing our toll-free number:

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for

the following information:

— Your name, address, and telephone

number

— Vehicle identification number (on dash panel)

— Date of purchase

— Current odometer reading

— Your NISSAN dealer’s name

— Your comments or questions

You can write to NISSAN with the information

on the left at:

For U.S. customers

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 191

For U.S. customers

1-800-NISSAN-1

Gardena, California 90248-0191

For Canadian customers

Nissan Canada Inc.

(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers

1-800-387-0122

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of

Contents

Illustrated table of contents

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio

systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

0 Illustrated table of contents

Exterior front............................................................................ 0-2

Exterior rear ............................................................................. 0-3

Instrument panel..................................................................... 0-4

Meters and gauges ............................................................... 0-6

Engine compartment check locations .............................. 0-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EXTERIOR FRONT

1. Hood (Page 3-9)

2. Windshield wiper and washer switch

(P.2-20)/Wiper replacement (P.8-19)

3. Headlight and turn signal switch (P.2-20)/

Bulbreplacement (P.8-26)

4. Interior light (P.2-37)

5. Sunroof (if so equipped)

6. Power windows (P.2-33)

7. Towing hook (P.6-14)

8. Fog light switch (if so equipped) (P.2-24)/

Daytime running light (for Canada) (P.2-33)

9. Tires

— Wheel and tires (P.8-27, P.9-9)

— Flat tire (P.6-2)

10. Mirrors (P.3-14)

11. Doors

— Keys (P.3-2)

— Door locks (P.3-3)

— Keyfob(P.3-5)

SSI0008

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

EXTERIOR REAR

1. Fuel filler lid (P.3-11)/Fuel recommendation

(P.9-2)

2. Side marker, Stop/Tail, Turn signal light (Bulb

replacement) (P.8-24)

3. Rear window defroster switch (P.2-19)

4. High-mounted stop light (P.8-26)

5. Rear window wiper and washer switch

(P.2-19)

6. Luggage light (P.2-39, P.8-26)

7. Back-up light (Bulbreplacement) (P.8-26)

8. Back door opener handle (P.3-9)

SSI0009

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. Headlight, fog light (if so equipped) and turn

signal switch (P.2-20)

2. Trip odometer reset button (P.2-4)

3. Instrument brightness control switch

(P.2-24)

4. Meters/gauges (P.2-3)

5. Windshield (P.2-18)/rear window (P.2-19)

wiper and washer switch

6. Hazard warning flasher switch (P.2-25)

7. Center ventilator (P.4-16)

8. Audio control (P.4-20)

9. Display/clock (P.4-4)

10. Rear window defroster and Heated outside

mirror (if so equipped) switch (P.2-19)

11. Display screen control and/or Navigation

system* (P.4-2)

12. Passenger supplemental air bag (P.1-9)

13. Side ventilator (P.4-16)

14. Headlight aiming control switch (if so

equipped) (P.2-23)

15. VDC (Vehicle dynamic control) off switch (if

so equipped) (P.2-27) or Headlight aiming

control (if so equipped) (P.2-23)

16. Steering switch for audio control (P.4-32)

17. Fuse box cover (P.8-21)

18. Tilting steering wheel lock lever (P.3-13)

19. Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-9)/Horn

(P.2-25)

20. Cruise control main/set switch (if so

equipped) (P.5-19)

21. Ignition switch/steering lock (P.5-8)

22. Heater/air conditioner control (P.4-16)

23. Coin box (P.2-28)

24. Outside mirror remote control (P.3-15)

25. Cellular phone holder (P.2-29)

SIC2038

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

26. AWD lock switch (AWD models) (P.5-23)

27. Heated seat switch (if so equipped)

(P.2-26)

28. Power outlet cover (P.2-27)

29. Glove box (P.2-30)

See the page indicated in parentheses for

operating details.

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

METERS AND GAUGES

1. Tachometer (P.2-4)

2. Turn signal indicator (P.2-24)/Hazard indica-

tor (P.2-25)

3. Speedometer (P.2-4)

4. Engine coolant temperature gauge (P.2-5)

5. Fuel gauge (P.2-5)

6. Reset button for trip odometer (P.2-4)

7. Warning/Indicator lights (P.2-9)

8. Odometer (Total/Twin trip) (P.2-4)

9. CVT shift position indicator (P.5-10)

SIC2039

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

1. Power steering fluid reservoir (P.8-12)

2. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-10)

3. Brake fluid reservoir (P.8-12)

4. Air cleaner (P.8-16)

5. Windshield washer fluid reservoir (P.8-13)

6. Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-8)

7. Radiator filler cap (P.8-8)

8. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-9)

9. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-21)

10. Battery (P.8-14)

SDI1492

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

MEMO

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag

systems

Seats......................................................................................... 1-2

Front manual seat adjustment — passenger side... 1-2

Front power seat adjustment ........................................ 1-3

Rear seat adjustment ...................................................... 1-5

Head restraint adjustment.............................................. 1-7

Active head restraint (front seats) ............................... 1-8

Armrest ............................................................................... 1-9

Supplemental restraint system ........................................... 1-9

Precautions on supplemental restraint system......... 1-9

Supplemental air bag warning labels....................... 1-20

Supplemental air bag warning light.......................... 1-20

Seat belts .............................................................................. 1-22

Precautions on seat belt usage................................. 1-22

Child safety ..................................................................... 1-24

Pregnant women............................................................ 1-25

Injured persons............................................................... 1-25

Three-point type seat belt with retractor................. 1-25

Rear center seat belt.................................................... 1-29

Seat belt extenders....................................................... 1-31

Seat belt maintenance ................................................. 1-32

Child restraints..................................................................... 1-32

Precautions on child restraints................................... 1-32

Installation on rear seat center or outboard

positions........................................................................... 1-34

Latch (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)

system .............................................................................. 1-39

Top tether strap child restraint................................... 1-40

Installation on front passenger seat.......................... 1-42

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SEATS

FRONT MANUAL SEAT

ADJUSTMENT — Passenger side

WARNING

After adjustment, gently rock in the seat

to make sure it is securely locked.

SSS0133

For most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat

should be upright. Always sit well

back in the seat and adjust the seat

belt properly. See “Precautions on

seat belt usage” later in this section.

WARNING

Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident

you could be thrown into it and re-

ceive neck or other serious injuries.

You could also slide under the lap

belt and receive serious internal

injuries.

1-2 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FRONT POWER SEAT

ADJUSTMENT

WARNING

Do not adjust the driver’s seat while

driving so full attention may be given

to vehicle operation.

Do not leave children unattended in-

side the vehicle. They could unknow-

ingly activate switches or controls.

Unattended children could become

involved in serious accidents.

SSS0179

Forward and backward

Reclining

Operating tips

Pull the lever up while you slide the seat forward

or backward to the desired position. Release the

lever to lock the seat in position.

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and

lean back. To bring the seatback forward again,

pull the lever and move your body forward. The

seatback moves forward.

The seat motor has an auto-reset overload

protection circuit. If the motor stops during

operation, wait 30 seconds, then reactivate

the switch.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes to help

obtain proper seat belt fit. (See “Precautions on

seat belt usage” later in this section.) The seat-

back may also be reclined to allow occupants to

rest when the vehicle is parked.

Do not operate the power support seat

for a long period of time when the engine is

off. This will discharge the battery.

See “Automatic drive positioner” in the “3. Pre-

driving checks and adjustments” for automatic

seat positioner operation.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SSS0148

SSS0166

Forward and backward

Reclining

Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’s

seat)

Moving the switch forward or backward will slide

the seat forward or backward to the desired

position.

Move the recline switch backward until the

desired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback

forward again, move the switch forward and

move your body forward. The seatback will move

forward.

Push the front or rear end of the switch up or

down to adjust the angle and height of the seat.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes to help

obtain proper seat belt fit. (See “Precautions on

seat belt usage” later in this section.) The seat-

back may also be reclined to allow occupants to

rest when the vehicle is parked.

1-4 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Remove the head restraints.

5. After closing the tonneau subcover (if so

equipped) from each rear seatback, pull the

strap on the rear seat k or pull the lever k

beside the cargo area and fold the seatback.

6. When returning the seatbacks, be sure to

install the head restraints and attach the rear

center seat belt connector.

WARNING

Never allow anyone to ride in the

cargo area or on the rear seat when it

is in the fold-down position. Use of

these areas by passengers without

proper restraints could result in seri-

ous injury in an accident or sudden

stop.

SSS0280

SSS0226

Lumbar support (if so equipped for

REAR SEAT ADJUSTMENT

Folding

driver’s seat)

The lumbar support feature provides lower back

support to the driver. Push each side of the

switch to adjust the seat lumbar area.

1. Secure the seat belt at the belt hooks on the

side wall. See “Seat belt hook” later in this

section.

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a

cargo area inside of a vehicle. In a

collision, people riding in these areas

are more likely to be seriously in-

jured or killed.

2. Secure the center seat belt and tongues into

the retractor base. See “Stowing rear center

seat belt” later in this section.

3. Put the seat belt buckles into the seat cush-

Do not allow people to ride in any

area of your vehicle that is not

equipped with seats and seat belts.

ion.

See “Storing rear seat belt buckles” later in

this section.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in

a seat and using a seat belt properly.

upright position, be certain they are

completely secured in the latched po-

sition. If they are not completely se-

cured, passengers may be injured in

an accident or sudden stop.

Do not fold down the rear seats when

occupants are in the rear seat area or

any luggage is on the rear seat.

When returning the seatbacks, be

sure to attach the rear center seat

belt connector.

Head restraints should be adjusted

properly as they may provide signifi-

cant protection against injury in an

accident. Always replace and adjust

them properly if they have been re-

moved for any reason.

Do not unfasten the rear center seat

belt connector except when folding

down the rear seat.

SSS0227

If the head restraints are removed for

any reason, they should be securely

stored to prevent them from causing

injury to passengers or damage to

the vehicle in case of sudden braking

or an accident.

When attaching the rear center seat

belt connector, be certain that the

seatbacks are completely secured in

the latched position and the rear cen-

ter seat belt connector is completely

secured.

Reclining

Pull the reclining strap

and position the seat

back at the desired angle 2 . Release the

reclining strap

after positioning the seat at

the desired angle 2 .

Properly secure all cargo to help pre-

vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the seat-

backs. In a sudden stop or collision,

unsecured cargo could cause per-

sonal injury.

If the center seat belt connector and

the seatbacks are not secured in the

correct position, serious personal in-

jury may result in an accident or sud-

den stop.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes to help

obtain proper seat belt fit. (See “Precautions on

seat belt usage” later in this section.) The seat-

back may also be reclined to allow occupants to

rest when the vehicle is parked.

When returning the seatbacks to the

1-6 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WARNING

Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident

you could be thrown into it and re-

ceive neck or other serious injuries.

You could also slide under the lap

belt and receive serious internal inju-

ries.

For most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat

should be upright. Always sit well

back in the seat and adjust the seat

belt properly. See “Seat belts” later

in this section for precautions on

seat belt usage.

SSS0125B

SSS0228

HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT

Do not remove them. Check the adjust-

ment after someone else uses the seat.

To raise the head restraint, just pull it up. To

lower, push the lock knoband push the head

restraint down.

To adjust the head restraint forward and back-

ward, push it in the direction required. (Type B)

After adjustment, check to be sure

the seat is securely locked.

WARNING

Head restraints should be adjusted

properly as they may provide significant

protection against injury in an accident.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Active head restraints are designed

to supplement other safety systems.

Always wear seat belts. No system

can prevent all injuries in any acci-

dent.

Do not attach anything to the head

restraint stalks. Doing so could im-

pair active head restraint function.

The head restraint moves forward utilizing the

force that the seatback receives from the occu-

pant in a rear-end collision. The movement of the

head restraint helps support the occupant’s

head by reducing its backward movement and

helping absorb some of the forces that may lead

to whiplash type injuries.

SSS0178

SPA1025

Adjust the head restraints so the center is level

with the center of your ears.

ACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINT (front

seats)

Active head restraints are effective for collisions

at low to medium speeds in which it is said that

whiplash injury occurs most.

WARNING

Always adjust the head restraints

properly as specified in the previous

section. Failure to do so can reduce

the effectiveness of the active head

restraint.

Active head restraints operate only in certain

rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head

restraints return to their original positions.

Properly adjust the active head restraints as

described in the previous section.

1-8 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM

PRECAUTIONS ON

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM

provided by the driver and passenger seat belts

and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts

should always be correctly worn and the occu-

pant seated a suitable distance away from the

steering wheel, instrument panel, door finishers

and side roof rails. (See “Seat belts” later in this

section for instructions and precautions on seat

belt usage.)

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-

tion contains important information concerning

the driver and passenger front impact supple-

mental air bags, front seat side-impact supple-

mental air bags, curtain side-impact air bags and

front seat pre-tensioner seat belts.

Supplemental front impact air bag system:

This system can help cushion the impact force to

the face and chest of the driver and front

passenger in certain frontal collisions.

After turning the ignition key to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7

seconds if the systems are operational.

SSS0229

Supplemental side-impact air bag system:

This system can help cushion the impact force to

the chest area of the driver and front passenger

in certain side impact collisions. The front seat

side-impact supplemental air bags are designed

to inflate on the side where the vehicle is

impacted.

ARMREST

Pull the armrest forward until it is horizontal.

Supplemental curtain side-impact air bag

system: This system can help cushion the im-

pact force to the head of occupants in front and

rear outboard seating positions in certain side

impact collisions. The curtain side-impact air

bags are designed to inflate on the side where

the vehicle is impacted.

These supplemental restraint systems are de-

signed to supplement the crash protection

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

steering wheel or instrument panel.

Always use the seat belts.

The driver and front passenger seat

belt buckles are equipped with sen-

sors that detect if the seat belts are

fastened. The air bag system moni-

tors the severity of a collision and

then inflates the air bags based on

belt usage. Failure to properly wear

seat belts can increase the risk or

severity of injury in an accident.

Keep hands on the outside of the

steering wheel. Placing them inside

the steering wheel rim could increase

the risk that they are injured when

the supplemental front air bag in-

flates.

SSS0131

when you are sitting well back and

upright in the seat. Front air bags

inflate with great force. If you are

unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting

sideways or out of position in any

way, you are at greater risk of injury

or death in a crash. You may also

receive serious or fatal injuries from

the supplemental front air bag if you

are up against it when it inflates.

Always sit back against the seatback

and as far away as practical from the

WARNING

The supplemental front air bags ordi-

narily will not inflate in the event of a

side impact, rear impact, roll over, or

lower severity frontal collision. Al-

ways wear your seat belts to help

reduce the risk or severity of injury in

various kinds of accidents.

The seat belts and the supplemental

front air bags are most effective

1-10 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SSS0132

SSS0006

SSS0007

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WARNING

Never let children ride unrestrained

or extend their hands or face out of

the window. Do not attempt to hold

them in your lap or arms. Some ex-

amples of dangerous riding positions

are shown in the previous illustra-

tions. Preteens and children should

be properly restrained in the rear

seat if possible.

Children may be severely injured or

killed when the supplemental front

air bags, side or curtain side-impact

air bags inflate if they are not prop-

erly restrained. Preteens and children

should be properly restrained in the

rear seat if possible.

SSS0008

SSS0099

Also never install a rear facing child

restraint in the front seat. An inflating

supplemental front air bag could se-

riously injure or kill your child. For

additional information, see “Child re-

straints” later in this section.

SSS0009

SSS0100

1-12 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SSS0101

SSS0188

SSS0140

The seat belts, the supplemental side

air bag and curtain side-impact air

bag are most effective when you are

sitting well back and upright in the

seat. The side air bag and curtain

side-impact air bag inflate with great

force. Do not allow anyone to place

their hand, leg or face near the side

air bag on the side of the seatback of

the front seat or near the side roof

rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in

the front seat or rear outboard seats

to extend their hand out of the win-

dow or lean against the door. Some

examples of dangerous riding posi-

tions are shown in the previous illus-

trations.

WARNING

Supplemental side air bag and curtain

side-impact air bag:

The supplemental side air bag and

curtain side-impact air bag ordinarily

will not inflate in the event of a fron-

tal impact, rear impact, rollover or

lower severity side collision. Always

wear your seat belts to help reduce

the risk or severity of injury in various

kinds of accidents.

When sitting in the rear seat, do not

hold onto the seatback of the front

seat. If the supplemental side air bag

inflates, you may be seriously in-

jured. Be especially careful with chil-

dren, who should always be properly

restrained.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SSS0159

SSS0162

Do not use seat covers on the front

seatbacks. They may interfere with

supplemental side air bag inflation.

1-14 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Supplemental front air bag system

The driver supplemental air bag is located in the

center of the steering wheel; the front passenger

supplemental air bag is mounted in the instru-

ment panel above the glove box. These systems

are designed to meet optional certification re-

quirements under U.S. regulations. They are also

permitted in Canada. The optional certification

allows front air bags to be designed to inflate

somewhat less forcefully than previously. How-

ever, all of the information, cautions and

warnings in this manual still apply and

must be followed. The front air bags are

designed to inflate in higher severity frontal

collisions, although they may inflate if the forces

in another type of collision are similar to those of

a higher severity frontal impact. They may not

inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle dam-

age (or lack of it) is not always an indication of

proper supplemental air bag operation.

The supplemental air bag system has dual stage

inflators for both the driver and passenger air

bags. The system monitors information from the

crash zone sensor, the diagnosis sensor unit and

seat belt buckle sensors that detect if the seat

belts are fastened, inflator operation is based on

the severity of a collision and whether the seat

belts are being used. Only one front air bag may

inflate in a crash, depending on the crash sever-

ity and whether the front occupants are belted or

SSS0230

1. Crash zone sensor

5. Seat belt pre-tensioner retractor

6. Satellite sensors

2. Supplemental front air bag modules

3. Supplemental curtain side-impact air bags

7. Diagnosis sensor unit

8. Supplemental side air bag modules

4. Supplemental curtain side-impact air bag

modules

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

unbelted. This does not indicate improper per-

formance of the system. If you have any ques-

tions about the performance of your air bag

system, please contact your NISSAN dealer.

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7

seconds if the system is operational.

Do not make unauthorized changes

to your vehicle’s electrical system,

suspension system or front end

structure. This could affect proper

operation of the supplemental air

bag system.

When the supplemental front air bag inflates, a

fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by

release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and

does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken

not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and

choking. Those with a history of a breathing

condition should get fresh air promptly.

WARNING

Do not place any objects on the

steering wheel pad or on the instru-

ment panel. Also, do not place any

objects between any occupant and

the steering wheel or instrument

panel. Such objects may become

dangerous projectiles and cause in-

jury if the supplemental front air bag

inflates.

Tampering with the supplemental

front air bag system may result in

serious personal injury. Tampering

includes changes to the steering

wheel and the instrument panel as-

sembly by placing material over the

steering wheel pad, above the dash-

board, or by installing additional trim

material around the air bag system.

Supplemental front air bags, along with the use

of seat belts, helps to cushion the impact force

on the face and chest of the front occupants.

They can help save lives and reduce serious

injuries. However, an inflating front air bag may

cause facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air

bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.

Right after inflation, several air bag

system components will be hot. Do

not touch them; you may severely

burn yourself.

Work around and on the supplemen-

tal front air bag system should be

done by a NISSAN dealer. Installa-

tion of electrical equipment should

also be done by a NISSAN dealer.

The yellow and orange Supplemental

Restrain System (SRS) wiring and

connectors should not be modified or

disconnected. Unauthorized electri-

cal test equipment and probing de

The seat belts should be correctly worn and the

driver and passenger seated upright as far as

practical away from the steering wheel or instru-

ment panel. The supplemental front air bags

inflate quickly in order to help protect the front

occupants. Because of this, the force of the front

air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if

the occupant is too close to, or is against the air

bag module during inflation. The air bag will

deflate quickly after the collision is over.

No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the supplemental front air bag sys-

tem. This is to prevent accidental in-

flation of the air bag or damage to

the air bag system.

After turning the ignition key to the ON

1-16 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

pacted, although they may inflate if the forces in

another type of collision are similar to those of a

higher severity side impact. They are designed to

inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.

They may not inflate in certain side collisions.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an

indication of proper supplemental side air bag

and curtain side-impact air bag operation.

vices should not be used on the air

bag system.

A cracked windshield should be re-

placed immediately by a qualified re-

pair facility. A cracked windshield

could affect inflation of the supple-

mental air bag system.

When the supplemental side air bag and curtain

side-impact air bag inflate, a fairly loud noise

may be heard, followed by release of smoke.

This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate

a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it

may cause irritation and choking. Those with a

history of a breathing condition should get fresh

air promptly.

The SRS wiring harness connectors

are yellow and orange for easy iden-

tification.

SSS0190

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the supplemental front air

bag system and guide the buyer to the appro-

priate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

Supplemental side air bag and curtain

side-impact air bag systems

Supplemental side air bags, along with the use

of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on

the chest of the front occupants. Curtain side-

impact air bags help to cushion the impact force

to the head of occupants in the front and rear

outboard seating positions. They can help save

lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an

inflating side air bag and curtain side-impact air

bag may cause abrasions or other injuries.

Supplemental side air bags and curtain side-

impact air bags do not provide restraint to the

lower body.

The supplemental side air bags are located in

the outside of the seatback of the front seats.

The supplemental curtain side-impact air bags

are located in the side roof rails. These systems

are designed to meet voluntary guidelines to

help reduce the risk of injury to out-of-position

occupants. However, all of the information,

cautions and warnings in this manual still

apply and must be followed. The supplemen-

tal side air bags and curtain side-impact air bags

are designed to inflate in higher severity side

collisions on the side where the vehicle is im-

The seat belts should be correctly worn and the

driver and passenger seated upright as far as

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat

passengers should be seated as far away as

practical from the door finishers and side roof

rails. The side air bags and curtain side-impact

air bag inflate quickly in order to help protect the

front occupants. Because of this, the force of the

side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag

inflating can increase the risk of injury if the

occupant is too close to, or is against, these air

bag modules during inflation. The side air bag

and curtain side-impact air bag will deflate

quickly after the collision is over.

inflates.

change the front seat by placing ma-

terial near the seatback or by install-

ing additional trim material, such as

seat covers, around the side air bag.

Right after inflation, several side air

bag and curtain side-impact air bag

system components will be hot. Do

not touch them; you may severely

burn yourself.

Work around and on the side air bag

and curtain side-impact air bag sys-

tem should be done by a NISSAN

dealer. Installation of electrical

equipment should also be done by a

NISSAN dealer. The SRS wiring har-

nesses* should not be modified or

disconnected. Unauthorized electri-

cal test equipment and probing de-

vices should not be used on the side

air bag system.

No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

this side air bag and curtain side-

impact air bag system. This is to pre-

vent accidental inflation of the side

air bag and curtain side-impact air

bag or damage to the side air bag

and curtain side-impact air bag sys-

tem.

After turning the ignition key to the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The air bag warning light

will turn off after about 7 seconds if the

systems are operational.

The SRS wiring harnesses are cov-

ered with yellow and orange insula-

tion either just before the harness

connectors or over the complete har-

ness for easy identification.

Do not make unauthorized changes

to your vehicle’s electrical system,

suspension system or side panel.

This could affect proper operation of

the supplemental side air bag and

curtain side-impact air bag system.

WARNING

Do not place any objects near the

seatback of the front seats. Also, do

not place any objects (an umbrella,

bag, etc.) between the front door fin-

isher and the front seat. Such objects

may become dangerous projectiles

and cause injury if the side air bag

Tampering with the supplemental

system may result in serious per-

sonal injury. For example, do not

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the side air bag and

curtain side-impact air bag system and guide the

buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s

Manual.

1-18 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates,

smoke is released and a loud noise may be

heard. The smoke is not harmful, but care should

be taken not to inhale it as it may cause irritation

and choking. Those with a history of a breathing

condition should get fresh air promptly.

Pre-tensioner seat belt system (For

front seats)

sioner seat belt system should be

done by a NISSAN dealer. Installa-

tion of electrical equipment should

also be done by a NISSAN dealer.

Unauthorized electrical test equip-

ment and probing devices should not

be used on the pretensioner seat belt

system.

WARNING

The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot be

reused after activation. It must be

replaced together with the retractor

as a unit.

If any abnormality occurs in the pre-tensioner

seat belt system, the supplemental air bag warn-

ing light

will not come on, will flash inter-

mittently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain

on after the ignition key has been turned to the

ON or START position. In this case, the pre-

tensioner seat belt may not function properly.

They must be checked and repaired. Take your

vehicle to the nearest NISSAN dealer.

If you need to dispose of the pre-

tensioner or scrap the vehicle, con-

tact a NISSAN dealer. Correct pre-

tensioner disposal procedures are

set forth in the appropriate NISSAN

Service Manual. Incorrect disposal

procedures could cause personal

injury.

If the vehicle becomes involved in a

frontal collision but the pre-tensioner

is not activated, be sure to have the

pre-tensioner system checked and, if

necessary, replaced by your NISSAN

dealer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the pre-tensioner seat

belt system and guide the buyer to the appro-

priate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the pre-tensioner seat belt system.

This is to prevent accidental activa-

tion of the pre-tensioner seat belt or

damage to the pre-tensioner seat

belt operation. Tampering with the

pre-tensioner seat belt system may

result in serious personal injury.

The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt system

activates in conjunction with the supplemental

front air bag. Working with the seat belt retrac-

tor, it helps tighten the seat belt the instant the

vehicle becomes involved in certain types of

collisions, helping to restrain front seat occu-

pants.

The pre-tensioner is encased with the seat belt’s

retractor. These seat belts are used the same as

conventional seat belts.

Work around and on the preten-

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPA0945C

SPA1097

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LABELS

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LIGHT

Warning labels about the supplemental air bag

system are placed in the vehicle as shown in the

illustration.

The supplemental air bag warning light, display-

ing in the instrument panel, monitors the

circuits of the supplemental front air bag,

supplemental side air bag and curtain side-

impact air bag systems, and pre-tensioner seat

belt. The circuits monitored by the air bag warn-

ing light are the diagnosis sensor unit, satellite

sensors, front air bag modules, side air bag

modules, curtain side-impact air bag modules,

and pre-tensioner seat belt and all related wiring.

After turning the ignition key to the ON position,

the supplemental air bag warning light illumi-

1-20 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

nates. The supplemental air bag warning light

will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is

operational.

bag systems and/or pre-tensioner seat

belt will not operate in an accident. To

help avoid injury to yourself or others,

have your vehicle checked by a NISSAN

dealer as soon as possible.

side air bag or curtain side-impact air

bag has inflated, the air bag module

will not function again and must be

replaced. Additionally, if any of the

supplemental front air bags inflate,

the activated pre-tensioner seat belt

must also be replaced. The air bag

module and pre-tensioner seat belt

If any of the following conditions occur, the

supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air

bag and curtain side-impact air bag systems,

and pre-tensioner seat belt need servicing:

Repair and replacement procedure

The supplemental air bag warning light re-

mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

The supplemental front air bags, supplemental

side air bags, curtain side-impact air bags and

pre-tensioner seat belt are designed to activate

on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless

it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning

light will remain illuminated after inflation has

occurred. Repair and replacement of these sys-

tems should be done only by a NISSAN dealer.

system should be replaced by

NISSAN dealer. The air bag modules

and pre-tensioner seat belt system

cannot be repaired.

The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

The supplemental air bag warning light does

not come on at all.

The supplemental front air bag and

side air bag, curtain side-impact air

bag systems and pre-tensioner seat

belt system should be inspected by a

NISSAN dealer if there is any damage

to the front end or side portion of the

vehicle.

Under these conditions, the supplemental front

air bags, supplemental side air bags, curtain

side-impact air bags and/or pre-tensioner seat

belt may not operate properly. They must be

checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the

nearest NISSAN dealer.

When maintenance work is required on the

vehicle, the supplemental front air bags, side air

bags, curtain side-impact air bags, related parts

and pre-tensioner seat belt should be pointed

out to the person conducting the maintenance.

The ignition key should always be in the LOCK

position when working under the hood or inside

the vehicle.

If you need to dispose of these

supplemental systems or scrap the

vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer.

Correct disposal procedures are set

forth in the appropriate NISSAN Ser-

vice Manual. Incorrect disposal pro-

cedures could cause personal injury.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning

light is on, it could mean that the

supplemental front air bag, supplemen-

tal side air bag, curtain side-impact air

WARNING

Once the supplemental front air bag,

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SEAT BELTS

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-

justed and you are sitting upright and well back

in your seat, your chances of being injured or

killed in an accident and/or the severity of injury

may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly en-

courages you and all of your passengers to

buckle up every time you drive, even if your

seating position includes a supplemental air bag.

Most states, provinces or territories re-

quire that seat belts be worn at all times

when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0134

chance or severity of injury in an

accident. Serious injury or death can

occur if the seat belt is not worn

properly.

WARNING

Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt at

all times. Children should be properly

restrained in the rear seat and, if

appropriate, in a child restraint.

Always route the shoulder belt over

your shoulder and across your chest.

Never run the belt behind your back

under your arm or across your neck.

The belt should be away from your

face and neck, but not falling off your

shoulder.

The belt should be properly adjusted

to a snug fit. Failure to do so may

reduce the effectiveness of the entire

restraint system and increase the

1-22 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Position the lap belt as low and snug

as possible around the hips, not the

waist. A lap belt worn too high could

increase the risk of internal injuries

in an accident.

Be sure the seat belt tongue is se-

curely fastened to the proper buckle.

Do not wear the belt inside out or

twisted. Doing so may reduce its ef-

fectiveness.

Do not allow more than one person

to use the same belt.

SSS0136

Never carry more people in the ve-

hicle than there are seat belts.

retractor. See your NISSAN dealer.

and continue to operate properly.

Seat belt assemblies not in use dur-

ing a collision should also be in-

spected and replaced if either dam-

age or improper operation is noted.

Removal and installation of the pre-

tensioner seat belt system compo-

nents should be done by a NISSAN

dealer.

If the seat belt warning light glows

continuously while the ignition is

turned ONwith all doors closed and

all seat belts fastened, it may indi-

cate a malfunction in the system.

Have the system checked by your

NISSAN dealer.

All child restraints and attaching

hardware should be inspected after

any collision. Always follow the re-

straint manufacturer’s inspection in-

structions and replacement recom-

mendations. The child restraints

should be replaced if they are dam-

aged.

All seat belt assemblies including re-

tractors and attaching hardware

should be inspected after any colli-

sion by your NISSAN dealer. NISSAN

recommends that all seat belt as-

semblies in use during a collision be

replaced unless the collision was mi-

nor and the belts show no damage

Once the pre-tensioner seat belt has

activated, it cannot be reused and

must be replaced together with the

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

straints available for larger children which should

be used for maximum protection.

CHILD SAFETY

Children need adults to help protect them.

They need to be properly restrained.

NISSAN recommends that all preteens and

children be restrained in the rear seat if

possible. According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properly restrained

in the rear seat than in the front seat.

The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.

Generally, infants (up to about 1 year and less

than 20 lb(9 kg) should be placed in rear facing

child restraints. Front facing child restraints are

available for children who outgrow rear facing

child restraints.

This is especially important because your

vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-

tem (air bag system) for the front passen-

ger (see “Supplemental Restraint System”

earlier in this section for precautions).

WARNING

Infants and small children

SSS0016

Infants and children need special pro-

tection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not

fit them properly. The shoulder belt may

come too close to the face or neck. The

lap belt may not fit over their small hip

bones. In an accident, an improperly

fitting seat belt could cause serious or

fatal injury. Always use appropriate

child restraints.

NISSAN recommends that infants and small

children be placed in child restraints that comply

with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You

should choose a child restraint that fits your

vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s

instructions for installation and use.

Larger children

Children who are too large for child restraint

systems should be seated and restrained by the

seat belts which are provided.

All US states and provinces of Canada require

the use of approved child restraints for infants

and small children. (See “Child restraints” later in

this section.)

If the child’s seating position has a shoulder belt

that fits close to the face or neck, the use of a

booster seat (commercially available) may help

SSS0014

In addition, there are many types of child re-

1-24 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

overcome this. The booster seat should raise the

child so that the shoulder belt is properly posi-

tioned across the top, middle portion of the

shoulder and the lap belt is low on the hips. The

booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have

a label certifying that it complies with Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child

has grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or

near the face and neck, use the shoulder belt

without the booster seat.

INJURED PERSONS

NISSAN recommends that injured persons use

seat belts, depending on the injury. Check with

your doctor for specific recommendations.

WARNING

SSS0018

Never let a child stand or kneel on any

seat and do not allow a child in the

cargo areas while the vehicle is moving.

The child could be seriously injured or

killed in an accident or a sudden stop.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt at

all times.

PREGNANT WOMEN

NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use

seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug,

and always position the lap belt as low as

possible around the hips, not the waist. Place

the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across

your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over

your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for

specific recommendations.

Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SSS0020

SSS0102

SSS0061

3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug

Fastening the seat belts

you could be thrown into it and re-

ceive neck or other serious injuries.

You could also slide under the lap

belt and receive serious internal inju-

ries.

on the hips as shown.

1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this

section.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the

retractor to take up extra slack. Make sure the

shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder

and across your chest.

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor

and insert the tongue into the buckle until it

snaps. For additional information regarding

the rear center seat belt, see “Rear center

seat belt” later in this section.

For most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat

should be upright. Always sit well

back in the seat and adjust the seat

belt properly.

The front passenger and rear seat belts have a

cinching mechanism for child restraint installa-

tion. It is referred to as the automatic locking

mode.

The retractor is designed to lock during a

sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling

motion will permit the belt to move, and

allow you some freedom of movement in

the seat.

When the cinching mechanism is activated the

seat belt cannot be withdrawn again until the

seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and

fully retracted. For additional information, see

1-26 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

“Child restraints” later in this section.

ward. The retractor should lock and restrict

further belt movement.

The automatic locking mode should be

used only for child restraint installation.

During normal seat belt use by a passen-

ger, the locking mode should not be acti-

vated. If it is activated it may cause uncom-

fortable seat belt tension.

If the retractor does not lock during this check or

if you have any questions about belt operation,

see your NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be

certain that seatbacks are completely

secured in the latched position. If

they are not completely secured, pas-

sengers may be injured in an acci-

dent or sudden stop.

SSS0021

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the belt, press the button on the

buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract.

When attaching the rear center seat

belt connector, be certain that the

seatbacks are completely secured in

the latched position and the rear cen-

ter seat belt connector is completely

secured.

Checking seat belt operation

Your seat belt retractors are designed to lock

belt movement using two separate methods:

when the belt is pulled quickly from the

retractor.

If the rear center seat belt connector

and the seatbacks are not secured in

the correct position, serious personal

injury may result in an accident or

sudden stop.

when the vehicle slows down rapidly.

You can check their operation as follows:

grasp the shoulder belt and pull quickly for-

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WARNING

After adjustment, release the adjust-

ment button and try to move the

shoulder belt down to make sure it is

securely fixed in position.

The shoulder belt anchor height

should be adjusted to the position

best for you. Failure to do so may

reduce the effectiveness of the entire

restraint system and increase the

chance or severity of injury in an

accident.

SPA0739

SSS0231

Shoulder belt height adjustment

Seat belt hook

(Except for rear center seat)

When folding down the rear seat, hook the rear

seat belt at the belt hook.

The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-

justed to the position best suited for you. (See

“Precautions on seat belt usage” earlier in this

section.) To lower, pull the release button, and

then move the shoulder belt anchor to the

desired position, so that the belt passes over the

shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock

the shoulder belt anchor into position.

To raise, move the adjuster up to the desired

position without pushing the button.

1-28 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SSS0240

SSS0241

REAR CENTER SEAT BELT

WARNING

The rear center seat belt has a connector tongue

and a seat belt tongue 2 . Both the con-

Always fasten the connector tongue

and the seat belt in the order shown.

nector tongue and the seat belt tongue must be

securely latched for proper seat belt operation.

Always make sure both the connec-

tor tongue and the seat belt tongue

are secured when using the seat belt.

Do not use it with only the seat belt

tongue attached. This could result in

serious personal injury in case of an

accident or a sudden stop.

SSS0225

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Stowing rear center seat belt

and the seatbacks are not secured in

the correct position, serious personal

injury may result in an accident or

sudden stop.

When folding down the rear seat, the rear center

seat belt can be retracted into a stowed position

as follows:

1. Release the connector tongue

by insert-

ing a suitable tool such as key into the

connector buckle k.

2. Secure the seat belt tongue into the retractor

base first 2 .

3. Then secure the connector tongue into the

retractor base 3 .

WARNING

Do not unfasten the rear center seat

belt connector except when folding

down the rear seat.

When attaching the rear center seat

belt connector, be certain that the

seatbacks are completely secured in

the latched position and the rear cen-

ter seat belt connector is completely

secured.

If the rear center seat belt connector

SSS0232

1-30 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Attaching rear center seat belt

When attaching the rear center seat

belt connector, be certain that the

seatbacks are completely secured in

the latched position and the rear cen-

ter seat belt connector is completely

secured.

Always be sure the rear center seat belt connec-

tor tongue and connector buckle are attached.

Disconnect only when folding down the rear

seat.

To connect the buckle:

1. Pull out the connector tongue from the re-

If the rear center seat belt connector

and the seatbacks are not secured in

the correct position, serious personal

injury may result in an accident or

sudden stop.

tractor base 1 .

2. Pull out the seat belt tongue from the retrac-

tor base 2 .

3. Pull the seat belt and secure the connector

buckle until it clicks 3 .

SSS0235

The center seat belt connector tongue and

buckle are indicated by the “̄” and “̆” mark.

Storing rear seat belt buckles

Before folding down the seat, put the buckles in

the storage of the seat cushion to avoid drop-

ping it under the seat cushion.

The center seat belt connector tongue can be

attached only into the rear center seat belt

connector buckle.

To fasten the seat belt, see “Fastening the seat

belt” earlier in this section.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it is

not possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder belt

and fasten it, an extender is available. The ex-

tender adds approximately 8 inches (200 mm) of

length and may be used for either the driver or

front passenger seating position. See your

NISSAN dealer for assistance if the extender is

required.

WARNING

Do not unfasten the rear center seat

belt connector except when folding

down the rear seat.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CHILD RESTRAINTS

If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of

the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may

retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide

with a clean, dry cloth.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD

RESTRAINTS

WARNING

Only NISSAN belt extenders, made

by the same company which made

the original equipment belts, should

be used with NISSAN belts.

WARNING

Periodically check to see that the seat

belt and the metal components such as

buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires

and anchors work properly. If loose parts,

deterioration, cuts or other damage on the

webbing is found, the entire belt assembly

should be replaced.

Infants and small children should al-

ways be placed in an appropriate

child restraint while riding in the ve-

hicle. Failure to use a child restraint

can result in serious injury or death.

Adults and children who can use the

standard seat belt should not use an

extender. Such unnecessary use

could result in serious personal in-

jury in the event of an accident.

Infants and small children should

never be carried on your lap. It is not

possible for even the strongest adult

to resist the forces of a severe acci-

dent. The child could be crushed be-

tween the adult and parts of the ve-

hicle. Also, do not put the same seat

belt around both your child and your-

self.

Never use seat belt extenders to in-

stall child restraints. If the child re-

straint is not secured properly, the

child could be seriously injured in a

collision or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

Never install a rear facing child re-

straint in the front seat. An inflating

supplemental air bag could seriously

injure or kill your child. A rear facing

child restraint must only be used in

the rear seat.

To clean the seat belt webbings, apply a

mild soap solution or any solution recom-

mended for cleaning upholstery or carpets.

Then brush the webbing, wipe it with a cloth

and allow it to dry in the shade. Do not allow

the seat belts to retract until they are com-

pletely dry.

1-32 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

NISSAN recommends that the child

restraint be installed in the rear seat.

According to accident statistics, chil-

dren are safer when properly re-

strained in the rear seat than in the

front seat.

restraint, be sure to select one which

will fit your child and vehicle. It may

not be possible to properly install

some types of child restraints in your

vehicle.

check the child restraint in your vehicle to be

sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat

and seat belt system.

if the child restraint is compatible with your

vehicle, place your child in the child restraint

and check the various adjustments to be sure

the child restraint is compatible with your

child. Always follow all recommended proce-

dures.

If the child restraint is not anchored

properly, the risk of a child being

injured in a collision or a sudden stop

greatly increases.

An improperly installed child re-

straint could lead to serious injury or

death in an accident.

Adjustable seatbacks should be po-

sitioned to fit the child restraint, but

as upright as possible.

In general, child restraints are designed to be

installed with the lap portion of a three-point type

seat belt. In addition, this vehicle is equipped

with a universal child restraint lower anchor

system, referred to as the LATCH (Lower An-

chors and Tethers for CHildren) system. Some

child restraints include two rigid or webbing-

mounted attachments that can be connected to

these lower anchors. For details, see “LATCH

(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) SYS-

TEM” later in this section.

All US states and Canadian provinces re-

quire that infants and small children be

restrained in approved child restraints at

all times while the vehicle is being oper-

ated.

After attaching the child restraint,

test it before you place the child in it.

Tilt it from side to side. Try to tug it

forward and check to see if the belt

holds the restraint in place. The child

restraint should not move more than

1 inch (25 mm). If the restraint is not

secure, tighten the belt as necessary,

or put the restraint in another seat

and test it again.

WARNING

Improper use of a child restraint can

result in increased injuries for both

the infant or child and other occu-

pants in the vehicle.

Child restraints for infants and children of various

sizes are offered by several manufacturers.

When selecting any child restraint, keep the

following points in mind:

For a front facing child restraint,

check to make sure the shoulder belt

does not go in front of the child’s face

Follow all of the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions for installation

and use. When purchasing a child

choose only a restraint with a label certifying

that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTALLATION ON REAR SEAT

CENTER OR OUTBOARD

POSITIONS

or neck. If it does, put the shoulder

belt behind the child restraint. If you

must install a front facing child re-

straint in the front seat, see instruc-

tions later in this section.

WARNING

When your child restraint is not in

use, store it in the trunk or keep it

secured with a seat belt to prevent it

from being thrown around in case of

a sudden stop or accident.

The three-point rear seat belts on

your vehicle are equipped with a

locking mode retractor which must

be used when installing a child re-

straint.

Failure to do so will result in the child

restraint not being properly secured.

It could tip over or otherwise be un-

secured and cause injury to the child

in a sudden stop or collision.

SSS0252A

Front fac^Fin^rog^{nt Facing (outboard) — step 1}

CAUTION

Remember that a child restraint left in a

closed vehicle can become very hot.

Check the seating surface and buckles

before placing your child in the child

restraint.

When you install a child restraint in a rear

outboard or center seat, follow these steps:

When installing a child restraint sys-

tem in the rear center position, both

the center seat belt connector tongue

and buckle tongue must be secured.

See “Attaching rear center seat belt”

earlier in this section.

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. It can

be placed in a front facing direction, depend-

ing on the size of the child. Adjust the head

restraint to its highest position or remove it if

the child restraint uses a top tether strap.

Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s

instructions.

1-34 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SSS0262B

SSS0253A

SSS0254A

Front Facing (center) — step 1

Front Facing — step 2

Front Facing — step 3

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage.

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is

fully extended. At this time, the belt retractor

is in the automatic locking mode (child re-

straint mode). It reverts back to emergency

locking mode when the belt is fully retracted.

Be sure to follow the child restraint manufac-

turer’s instructions for belt routing.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

belt is allowed to wind back into the retractor,

the automatic locking mode (child restraint

mode) is canceled; the seat belt only locks

during a sudden stop or impact.

SSS0062A

SSS0255A

Front Facing — step 4

Front Facing — step 5

4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the belt to

remove any slack in the belt.

5. Before placing the child in the child restraint,

use force to tilt the child restraint from side to

side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is

securely held in place. It should not move

more than 1 inch (25 mm).

6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic

locking mode by trying to pull more belt out of

the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt

webbing out of the retractor, the belt is in the

automatic locking mode.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the belt

is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

1-36 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SSS0256C

SSS0257B

SSS0046A

Rear Facing (center) — step 1

Rear Facing — step 2

Rear faci^Rn^eg^{ar Facing (outboard) — step 1}

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage.

When you install a child restraint in a rear

outboard or center seat, follow these steps:

Be sure to follow the child restraint manufac-

turer’s instructions for belt routing.

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. The

direction of the child restraint depends on the

type of the child restraint and the size of the

child. Always follow the restraint manufactur-

er’s instructions.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SSS0258A

SSS0259A

SSS0260A

Rear Facing — step 3

Rear Facing — step 4

Rear Facing — step 5

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is

fully extended. At this time, the belt retractor

is in the automatic locking mode (child re-

straint mode). It reverts back to emergency

locking mode when the belt is fully retracted.

4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the belt to

remove any slack in the belt.

5. Before placing the child in the child restraint,

use force to tilt the child restraint from side to

side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is

securely held in place. It should not move

more than 1 inch (25 mm).

6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic

locking mode by trying to pull more belt out of

the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt

webbing out of the retractor, the belt is in the

automatic locking mode.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the belt

is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

1-38 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

belt is allowed to wind back into the retractor,

the automatic locking mode (child restraint

mode) is canceled; the seat belt only locks

during a sudden stop or impact.

Do not secure a child restraint in the

center rear seating position using the

child restraint lower anchors. The

child restraint will not be secured

properly.

The LATCH system anchors are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstance are

they to be used for adult seat belts or

harnesses.

SSS0233

Some child restraints include two rigid or

webbing-mounted attachments that can be con-

nected to two anchors located at certain seating

positions in your vehicle. This system is known

as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system. This system may also be

referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible

system. With this system, you do not have to use

a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint.

Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor

points that are used with LATCH system com-

patible child restraints. Check your child restraint

for a label stating that it is compatible with the

LATCH system. This information may also be in

the child restraint owner’s manual. If you have

such a child restraint, refer to the illustration for

LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND

TETHERS FOR CHILDREN)

SYSTEM

WARNING

Attach LATCH system compatible

child restraints only at the locations

shown. If a child restraint is not se-

cured properly, your child could be

seriously injured or killed in an

accident.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

the seating positions equipped with LATCH

system anchors which can be used to secure the

child restraint.

not be secured properly if the LATCH

system anchors are obstructed.

1. To install the LATCH system compat-

ible child restraint, insert the child

restraint LATCH system anchor at-

tachments into the anchor points on

the rear. If the child restraint is

equipped with a top tether, see “Top

tether strap child restraint” later in

this section for installation instruc-

tions.

The LATCH system anchors are located at the

rear of the seat cushion near the seatback. A

label is attached to the seatback to help you

locate the LATCH system anchors.

Some child restraints may also require the use of

a top tether strap. See “Top tether strap child

restraint” later in this section for installation

instructions.

When installing a child restraint, carefully read

and follow the instructions in this manual and

those supplied with the child restraint.

2. After attaching the child restraint and

before placing the child in it, use

force to tilt the child restraint from

side to side and tug it forward to

make sure that the child restraint is

securely held in place. It should not

move more than 1 inch (25 mm).

SSS0234

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD

RESTRAINT

When you install a LATCH system compatible

child restraint to the lower anchor attachments,

follow these steps.

WARNING

3. Check to make sure that the child

restraint is properly secured prior to

each use.

The child restraint anchor points are

designed to withstand only those

loads imposed by correctly fitted

child restraints. Under no circum-

stances are they to be used for adult

seat belts or harnesses.

Inspect the lower anchors by inserting

your fingers into the lower anchor area

and feeling to make sure there are no

obstructions over the LATCH system an-

chors, such as seat belt webbing or seat

cushion material. The child restraint will

1-40 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Remove the head restraint from the seatback.

Store it in a secure place. Position the top tether

strap over the top of the seatback and secure it

to the tether anchor bracket that provides the

straightest installation. Tighten the tether strap

according to the manufacturer’s instruction to

remove any slack.

If you have any questions when installing a

top strap child restraint on the rear seat,

consult your NISSAN dealer for details.

After removing a rear seat head re-

straint for top tether installation,

store it securely to prevent it from

causing injury to passengers or dam-

age to the vehicle in case of sudden

braking or an accident. Always re-

place it and adjust properly when top

tether is no longer in use.

For best child restraint fit, see the child restraint

installation instructions in this section and the

child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

The top tether strap may be damaged

by contact with the tonneau cover or

items in the cargo area. Remove the

tonneau cover from the vehicle or

secure it and any cargo. Your child

could be seriously injured or killed in

a collision if the top tether strap is

damaged.

Anchor point locations

WARNING

The anchor bolt should be installed at

all times to prevent the possibility of

exhaust fumes entering the passenger

compartment through the holes. See

“Precautions when starting and driving”

in the “5. Starting and driving” section

for exhaust gas.

If your child restraint has a top tether strap, it

must be secured to the anchor point provided

behind its position.

First, adjust the seatback so that it is upright.

Then secure the child restraint with the rear seat

belt or the LATCH system (outboard positions),

Anchor points are located as illustrated.

k : for rear left side seat position

as applicable. For the center position k, re-

move the anchor cover from the anchor point as

illustrated. Keep the removed cover in a secure

place to prevent loss or damage.

k : for rear right side seat position

k : for rear center seat position

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ing a child restraint.

Failure to use the retractor’s locking

mode will result in the child restraint

not being properly secured. The child

restraint could tip over or otherwise

be unsecured and cause injury to the

child in a sudden stop or collision.

SSS0300

INSTALLATION ON FRONT

PASSENGER SEAT

NISSAN recommends that child re-

straints be installed in the rear seat.

However, if you must install a front

facing child restraint in the front pas-

senger seat, move the passenger

seat to the rearmost position.

WARNING

Never install a rear facing child re-

straint in the front passenger seat.

Supplemental air bags inflate with

great force. A rear facing child re-

straint could be struck by the supple-

mental air bag in a crash and could

seriously injure or kill your child.

A child restraint with a top tether

strap should not be used in the front

passenger seat.

The three-point belt in your vehicle is

equipped with a locking mode retrac-

tor which must be used when install-

1-42 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SSS0301

SSS0055

SSS0113

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-

structions for belt routing.

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until all of the belt is

fully extended. At this time, the belt retractor

is in the automatic locking mode (child re-

straint mode). It reverts back to emergency

locking mode when the belt is fully retracted.

Front facing

If you must install a child restraint in the front

seat, follow these steps:

1. Position the child restraint on the front pas-

senger seat. It should be placed in a front

facing direction only. Move the seat to the

rearmost position. Adjust the head restraint to

its highest position. Always follow the child

restraint manufacturer’s instructions. Child

restraints for infants must be used in

the rear facing direction and therefore

must not be used in the front seat.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

belt is allowed to wind back into the retractor,

the automatic locking mode (child restraint

mode) is canceled; the seat belt only locks

during a sudden stop or impact.

SSS0056

SSS0302

4. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the belt to

remove any slack in the belt.

5. Before placing the child in the child restraint,

use force to tilt the child restraint from side to

side, and tug it forward to make sure that it is

securely held in place. It should not move

more than 1 inch (25 mm).

6. Check that the retractor is in the automatic

locking mode by trying to pull more belt out of

the retractor. If you cannot pull any more belt

webbing out of the retractor, the belt is in the

automatic locking mode.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the lap

belt is not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

1-44 Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MEMO

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag systems 1-45

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel..................................................................... 2-2

Meters and gauges ............................................................... 2-3

Speedometer and odometer ......................................... 2-4

Tachometer........................................................................ 2-4

Engine coolant temperature gauge ............................. 2-5

Fuel gauge......................................................................... 2-5

Compass display (if so equipped) .................................... 2-6

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders............ 2-9

Checking bulbs................................................................. 2-9

Warning lights................................................................... 2-9

Indicator lights................................................................ 2-13

Audible reminders.......................................................... 2-15

Security systems.................................................................. 2-16

Vehicle security system................................................ 2-16

Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System .......................... 2-17

Windshield wiper and washer switch ........................... 2-18

Rear window wiper and washer switch ....................... 2-19

Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch...... 2-19

Headlight and turn signal switch ................................... 2-20

Xenon headlights (if so equipped) .......................... 2-20

Headlight switch ........................................................... 2-20

Daytime running light system (Canada only) ........ 2-23

Instrument brightness control..................................... 2-24

Turn signal switch ........................................................ 2-24

Fog light switch (if so equipped) .............................. 2-24

Hazard warning flasher switch......................................... 2-25

Horn........................................................................................ 2-25

Heated seats (if so equipped)......................................... 2-26

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch

(if so equipped) .................................................................. 2-27

Power outlet.......................................................................... 2-27

Storage .................................................................................. 2-28

Coin box........................................................................... 2-28

Cellular phone holder ................................................... 2-29

Cup holders .................................................................... 2-29

Glove box ........................................................................ 2-30

Console box.................................................................... 2-31

Cargo net (if so equipped) ......................................... 2-32

Tonneau cover (if so equipped)................................. 2-32

Windows................................................................................ 2-33

Power windows.............................................................. 2-33

Sunroof (if so equipped) ................................................... 2-35

Automatic sunroof ......................................................... 2-35

Interior lights......................................................................... 2-37

Ceiling light ..................................................................... 2-37

Map light.......................................................................... 2-38

Rear light ......................................................................... 2-38

Luggage light.................................................................. 2-39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Vanity mirror light (if so equipped) ................................. 2-39

HomeLink Universal Transceiver (if so equipped).... 2-39

Programming HomeLink ............................................ 2-40

Programming HomeLink for Canadian

Programming trouble diagnosis................................. 2-42

Clearing the programmed information...................... 2-42

Reprogramming a single HomeLink button.......... 2-42

If your vehicle is stolen................................................. 2-42

customers........................................................................ 2-41

Operating the HomeLink Universal

Transceiver ...................................................................... 2-42

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. Headlight, fog light (if so equipped) and turn

signal switch (P.2-20)

2. Trip odometer reset button (P.2-4)

3. Instrument brightness control switch

(P.2-24)

4. Meters/gauges (P.2-3)

5. Windshield (P.2-18)/rear window (P.2-19)

wiper and washer switch

6. Hazard warning flasher switch (P.2-25)

7. Center ventilator (P.4-16)

8. Audio control (P.4-20)

9. Display/clock (P.4-4)

10. Rear window defroster and Heated outside

mirror (if so equipped) switch (P.2-19)

11. Display screen control and/or Navigation

system* (P.4-2)

12. Passenger supplemental air bag (P.1-9)

13. Side ventilator (P.4-16)

14. Headlight aiming control switch (if so

equipped) (P.2-23)

15. VDC (Vehicle dynamic control) off switch (if

so equipped) (P.2-27) or Headlight aiming

control (if so equipped) (P.2-23)

16. Steering switch for audio control (P.4-32)

17. Fuse box cover (P.8-21)

18. Tilting steering wheel lock lever (P.3-13)

19. Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-9)/Horn

(P.2-25)

20. Cruise control main/set switch (if so

equipped) (P.5-19)

21. Ignition switch/steering lock (P.5-8)

22. Heater/air conditioner control (P.4-16)

23. Coin box (P.2-28)

24. Outside mirror remote control (P.3-15)

25. Cellular phone holder (P.2-29)

SIC2038

2-2 Instruments and controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

METERS AND GAUGES

26. AWD lock switch (AWD models) (P.5-22)

27. Heated seat switch (if so equipped)

(P.2-26)

28. Power outlet cover (P.2-27)

29. Glove box (P.2-30)

See the page indicated in parentheses for

operating details.

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.

SIC2039

1. Tachometer

6. Reset button for trip odometer

7. Warning/Indicator lights

2. Turn signal indicator/Hazard indicator

3. Speedometer

8. Odometer (Total/Twin trip)

9. CVT shift position indicator

4. Engine coolant temperature gauge

5. Fuel gauge

Instruments and controls 2-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Changing the display:

Pushing the reset button

located on the side

of the meter panel changes the display as

follows:

TRIP A → TRIP B → TRIP A

Resetting the trip odometer:

Pushing the reset button for more than 1 second

resets the trip odometer to zero.

SIC2175

SIC2041

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-

lutions per minute (rpm).

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

Do not rev engine into red zone k.

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer 1 /twin trip odometer

are

CAUTION

displayed when the ignition key is in the ON

position.

When engine speed approaches the red

zone, shift to a higher gear. Operating

the engine in the red zone may cause

serious engine damage.

The odometer records the total distance the

vehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance of

individual trips.

2-4 Instruments and controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates engine coolant

temperature over the normal range,

stop the vehicle as soon as safely pos-

sible. If the engine is overheated, con-

tinued operation of the vehicle may se-

riously damage the engine. See “If your

vehicle overheats” in the “6. In case of

emergency” section for immediate ac-

tion required.

SIC2042

SIC2043

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in

the tank.

The gauge indicates the engine coolant tem-

perature.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,

turning, acceleration, or going up or down hill.

The engine coolant temperature will vary with the

outside air temperature and driving conditions.

The gauge needle is designed to move to the E

(Empty) position when the ignition key is turned

to the OFF position.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-

ters Empty.

Instruments and controls 2-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COMPASS DISPLAY (if so

equipped)

The low fuel warning light comes on when

the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon

as it is convenient, preferably before the

gauge reaches E. There will be a small

reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel

gauge needle reaches E.

The

indicates that the fuel filler lid is

located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the

malfunction indicator lamp

(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon

as possible. After a few driving trips,

SIC1901

When the COMPASS switch is in the ON

position, the compass display will indicate the

direction the vehicle is heading.

the

lamp should turn off. If the

lamp remains on after a few driving

trips, have the vehicle inspected by a

NISSAN dealer.

N: north

E: east

S: south

W: west

For additional information, see the

“Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)”

later in this section.

If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass

by driving the vehicle in 3 complete circles at

less than 5 MPH (8 km/h).

You can also calibrate the compass by driving

your vehicle on your everyday route. The com-

pass will be calibrated once it has tracked 3

complete circles.

2-6 Instruments and controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Zone variation change procedure

The difference between magnetic north and

geographical north is known as variance. In

some areas, this difference can sometimes be

great enough to cause false compass readings.

Follow these instructions to set the variance for

your particular location if this happens:

1. Press the COMPASS switch for more than 3

seconds. The current zone number will ap-

pear in the display.

2. Find your current location and variance one

number on the zone map.

3. Press the COMPASS switch until the new

zone number appears in the display. After you

stop pressing the switch in, the display will

show a compass direction within a few sec-

onds.

Inaccurate compass direction:

1. With the display turned on, push the COM-

PASS switch for 3 seconds, until the zone

selection comes up (a number will be dis-

played in the mirror compass window).

2. Toggle until correct zone is found and release

switch.

3. The display will show all segments, and return

to the normal compass mode within 10 sec-

onds of no switch activity.

SIC0611

Instruments and controls 2-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. If the vehicle changes zone, repeat steps 1

thru 3. See map.

If the compass deviates from the correct

indication soon after repeated adjustment,

have the compass checked at an authorized

dealer.

The compass may not indicate the correct

compass point in tunnels or while driving up

or down a steep hill.

(The compass returns to the correct com-

pass point when the vehicle moves to an area

where the geomagnetism is stabilized.)

CAUTION

Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.

which are attached to the vehicle by

means of a magnet. They affect the

operation of the compass.

When cleaning the mirror, use a pa-

per towel or similar material damp-

ened with glass cleaner. Do not spray

glass cleaner directly on the mirror as

it may cause the liquid cleaner to

enter the mirror housing.

2-8 Instruments and controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS

AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

AWD (All wheel drive) LOCK indicator

light (AWD models)

Anti-lock brake warning light

Low washer fluid warning light

Seat belt warning light

AWD (All wheel drive) warning light

(AWD models)

High beam indicator light (Blue)

Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)

Security indicator light

Brake warning light

Charge warning light

Supplemental air bag warning light

Low tire pressure warning light (if so

equipped)

Door open warning light

Engine oil pressure warning light

Low fuel warning light

Cruise main switch indicator light

Cruise set indicator light

Slip indicator light (if so equipped)

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

CVT (Continuously variable transmission)

indicator light

Vehicle dynamic control off indicator light

(if so equipped)

trical system. Have the system repaired

promptly.

not functioning properly. Have the system

checked by your NISSAN dealer.

CHECKING BULBS

Apply the parking brake and turn the ignition key

to ON without starting the engine. The following

lights will come on:

If an abnormality occurs in the system, the

anti-lock function will cease but the ordinary

brakes will continue to operate normally. See

“Anti-lock brake system (ABS)” in the “5. Start-

ing and driving” section for further details.

WARNING LIGHTS

Anti-lock brake

warning light

The following lights come on briefly and then go

off:

After turning the ignition key to the ON position,

the light will illuminate. The light will turn off after

about 2 seconds if the system is operational.

If the light comes on while you are driving,

contact your NISSAN dealer for repair.

If any light fails to come on, it may indicate a

burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the elec-

If the light comes on while the engine is running,

it may indicate that the anti-lock brake system is

Instruments and controls 2-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Low brake fluid warning light:

AWD (All wheel drive) warning

light (AWD models)

idle the engine. The driving mode

will change to 2WD to prevent the

AWD system from malfunctioning.

If the warning light turns off, you

can drive again.

The light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the

light comes on while the engine is running with

the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle

and perform the following:

The

warning light comes on when the key

switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon after the

engine is started.

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid as

necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “8. Main-

tenance and do-it-yourself” section.

If the AWD system malfunctions or the revolu-

tion, or radius of the front and the rear wheel

differs, the warning light will either remain illumi-

nated or blink. See “Using all wheel drive

(AWD)” in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

•

blinks slowly (about once every 2

seconds):

Pull off the road in a safe area, and

idle the engine. Check that all tire

sizes are the same, tire pressure is

correct and tires are not worn.

WARNING

CAUTION

Your brake system may not be work-

ing properly if the warning light is on.

Driving could be dangerous. If you

judge it to be safe, drive carefully to

the nearest service station for re-

pairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle

towed because driving it could be

dangerous.

If the warning light is still on after the

above operation, have your vehicle

checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible.

If the warning light comes on while

driving, AWD mode will change to

2WD mode. Reduce the vehicle speed

and have your vehicle checked by a

NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

Brake warning light

Do not drive on dry hard surface

roads in the LOCK mode.

This light functions for both the parking brake

and the foot brake systems.

Pressing the brake pedal with the

engine stopped and/or low brake

fluid level may increase your stop-

ping distance and braking will re-

quire greater pedal effort as well as

greater pedal travel.

Parking brake indicator:

If the AWD warning light blinks when

you are driving:

When the ignition key is in the ON position, the

light comes on when the parking brake is ap-

plied.

•

blinks rapidly (about twice a sec-

ond):

Pull off the road in a safe area, and

2-10 Instruments and controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

If the brake fluid level is below the

MINmark on the brake fluid reser-

voir, do not drive until the brake sys-

tem has been checked at a NISSAN

dealer.

ous damage to the engine almost imme-

diately. Turn off the engine as soon as it

is safe to do so.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the belt is

loose, broken or missing.

Low fuel warning light

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the

warning system checked by NISSAN

Door open warning light

This light comes on when the fuel in the tank is

getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient,

preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E.

dealer. Avoid high speed driving and abrupt

braking.

This light comes on when any of the doors are

not closed securely while the ignition key is ON.

There will be a small reserve of fuel re-

maining in the tank when the fuel gauge

needle reaches E.

If both the brake warning light and the anti-

lock brake warning light come on simulta-

neously, it may indicate the anti-lock brake

system is not functioning properly. See “Anti-

lock brake warning light” earlier in this sec-

tion.

Engine oil pressure warning

light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the

light blinks or comes on during normal driving,

pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine

immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other

authorized repair shop.

Low washer fluid warning light

This light comes on when the washer tank fluid is

at a low level. Add washer fluid as necessary.

See “Window washer fluid” in the “8. Mainte-

nance and do-it-yourself” section.

Charge warning light

The oil pressure warning light is not de-

signed to indicate a low oil level. Use the

dipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine

oil” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”

section.

If the light comes on while the engine is running,

it may indicate that the charging system is not

functioning properly. Turn the engine off and

check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose,

broken, missing or if the light remains on, see

your NISSAN dealer immediately.

Seat belt warning light and

chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten seat

belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition

key is turned to ON, and will remain illuminated

until the driver’s seat belt is fastened. At the

same time, the chime will sound for about 6

seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is securely

fastened.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the oil pres-

sure warning light on could cause seri-

Instruments and controls 2-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

See “Seat belts” in the “1. Seats, restraints and

supplemental air bag systems” section for pre-

cautions on seat belt usage.

in the “1. Seats, restraints and supplemental air

bag systems” section.

proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s tire

information placard. Driving on a significantly

under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat

and can lead to tire failure.

WARNING

Supplemental air bag warning

light

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and

tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s han-

dling and stopping ability. Each tire, including

the spare, should be checked monthly when

cold and set to the recommended inflation pres-

sure as specified in the vehicle placard and

Owner’s Manual. The recommended inflation

pressure may also be found on the Tire and

Loading Information label.

If the supplemental air bag warning

light is on, it could mean that the

supplemental front air bag, supplemen-

tal side air bag, curtain air bag systems

and/or pre-tensioner seat belt will not

operate in an accident. To help avoid

injury to yourself or others, have your

vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as

soon as possible.

After turning the ignition key to the ON position,

the supplemental air bag warning light will illu-

minate. The supplemental air bag warning light

will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is

operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the

supplemental front air bag, supplemental side air

bag and curtain side-impact air bag systems,

and pre-tensioner seat belt needs servicing and

your vehicle must be taken to your nearest

NISSAN dealer.

Low tire pressure warning:

If the vehicle is being driven with a low tire

pressure (lower than 27 psi, 190 kPa), the light

will illuminate and the chime will sound for about

10 seconds. If you select the tire pressure in the

display (if so equipped), the FLAT TIRE warning

message will be displayed.

Low tire pressure warning light

(if so equipped)

The supplemental air bag warning light re-

mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

After the ignition switch is turned ON, this light

comes on for about 1 second and then turns off.

For additional information, see “Low tire pres-

sure warning system” in the “5. Starting and

driving” section and “Low tire pressure warning

system” in the “6. In case of emergency” section.

Also, you can check the pressure of all 4 tires on

the display screen. See “Tire pressure informa-

tion” in the “4. Display screen, heater, air condi-

tioner and audio systems” section.

The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

This light warns of low tire pressure.

NISSAN’s low tire pressure warning system is a

tire pressure monitoring system. It monitors tire

pressure of all tires except the spare. When the

tire pressure monitoring system warning light is

lit, one or more of your tires is significantly

under-inflated. You should stop and check your

tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the

The supplemental air bag warning light does

not come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the Supplemental

Restraint System and/or the pre-tensioner seat

belt may not function properly. For additional

information, see “Supplemental restraint system”

2-12 Instruments and controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel is replaced, the pressure of

that tire will not be indicated and the

low tire pressure warning system will

not function. Contact your NISSAN

dealer as soon as possible for tire

replacement and/or system reset-

ting.

WARNING

Cruise main switch indicator

light

If the light does not come on with the

key switch turned ON, have the ve-

hicle checked by a NISSAN dealer as

soon as possible.

The light comes on when the cruise control main

switch is pushed. The light goes out when the

main switch is pushed again. When the cruise

main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise

control system is operational.

If the light comes on while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneuvers or

abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,

pull off the road to a safe location

and stop the vehicle as soon as pos-

sible. Serious vehicle damage could

occur and may lead to an accident

and could result in serious personal

injury. Check the tire pressure for all

four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to

the recommended COLD tire pres-

sure shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label to turn the low tire

pressure warning light OFF. If the

light still comes on while driving after

adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may

be flat. If you have a flat tire, replace

Cruise set indicator light

The light comes on while the vehicle speed is

controlled by the cruise control system. If the

light blinks while the engine is running, it may

indicate the cruise control system is not func-

tioning properly. Have the system checked by

your NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

The low tire pressure warning system

is not a substitute for the regular tire

pressure check. Be sure to check the

tire pressure regularly.

CVT (Continuously variable

transmission) indicator light

If the vehicle is being driven at

speeds of less than 20 MPH (32

km/h), the low tire pressure warning

system may not operate correctly.

When the ignition switch is turned ON, the light

comes on for 2 seconds.

AWD (All wheel drive) LOCK

indicator light (AWD models)

Be sure to install the specified size of

tires to the four wheels correctly.

This light comes on when the ignition switch is

turned to ON, and turns off within 1 second.

it with

possible.

spare tire as soon as

When selecting LOCK mode while the engine is

running, this light will illuminate. See “Using all

Instruments and controls 2-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

wheel drive (AWD)” in the “5. Starting and

driving” section.

Malfunction indicator lamp on steady — An

emission control system and/or CVT mal-

function has been detected. Turn the ignition

key to OFF and check the fuel filler cap. If the

fuel filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or

install the cap and continue to drive the

CAUTION

High beam indicator light

(Blue)

Continued vehicle operation without

having the emission control system

checked and repaired as necessary

could lead to poor driveability, reduced

fuel economy, and possible damage to

the emission control system.

This light comes on when the headlight high

beam is on and goes out when the low beam is

selected.

vehicle. The

few driving trips. If the

lamp should turn off after a

lamp does not

turn off after a few driving trips, have the

vehicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You

do not need to have your vehicle towed to the

dealer.

Malfunction indicator lamp

(MIL)

Security indicator light

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on

steady or blinks while the engine is running, it

may indicate a potential emission control and/or

CVT malfunction.

Malfunction indicator lamp blinking — An

engine misfire has been detected which may

damage the emission control system. To re-

duce or avoid emission control system dam-

age:

This light blinks whenever the ignition switch is in

the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. This function

indicates the security systems equipped on the

vehicle are operational.

The malfunction indicator lamp may also come

on steady if the fuel filler cap is loose or missing,

or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make

sure the fuel filler cap is installed and closed

tightly, and that the vehicle has at least three

gallons of fuel in the fuel tank.

For additional information, see “Security sys-

tems” later in this section.

a) Do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH

(72 km/h).

b) Avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

c) Avoid steep uphill grades.

d) If possible, reduce the amount of cargo

being hauled or towed.

Slip indicator light (if so

equipped)

This indicator will blink when the VDC system or

the traction control system is operating, thus

alerting the driver to the fact that the road

surface is slippery and the vehicle is nearing its

traction limits.

After a few driving trips, the

lamp should

turn off if no other potential emission control

system malfunction exists.

The malfunction indicator lamp may stop

blinking and come on steady.

Operation

Have the vehicle inspected by a NISSAN

dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle

towed to the dealer.

The malfunction indicator lamp will come on in

one of two ways:

You may feel or hear the system working, but this

is normal.

2-14 Instruments and controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The light will blink on for a few seconds after the

VDC system stops limiting wheel spin.

dynamic control system’s fail-safe mode is op-

erating, that is the system may not be functioning

properly. Have the system checked by your

NISSAN dealer. If an abnormality occurs in the

system, the vehicle dynamic control system

function will be canceled but the vehicle is still

driveable. For additional information, see “Ve-

hicle dynamic control (VDC) system” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warn-

ings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it

will make a high pitched scraping sound when

the vehicle is in motion whether or not the brake

pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as

soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

The slip indicator light also comes on when you

turn the ignition key to ON. The light will turn off

after about 2 seconds if the system is opera-

tional. If the light does not come on or go off,

have the traction control system checked by your

NISSAN dealer.

Turn signal/hazard indicator

lights

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Key reminder chime

The light flashes when the turn signal switch

lever or hazard switch is turned on.

The chime will sound if the driver’s side door is

opened while the key is left in the ignition switch

(ignition switch is turned to OFF or ACC).

Remove the key and take it with you when

leaving the vehicle.

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC)

off indicator light (if so

equipped)

After turning the ignition key to the ON position,

the light will illuminate. The light will turn off in

about 2 seconds if the vehicle dynamic control

(VDC) system is operational.

Light reminder chime

The chime will sound when the driver’s door is

opened with the headlight switch on unless the

ignition key is in the ON position.

The light comes on when the vehicle dynamic

control (VDC) off switch is pushed to OFF. This

indicates the vehicle dynamic control system

and traction control system are not operating.

When the vehicle dynamic control off indicator

light and slip indicator light come on with the

vehicle dynamic control system turned on, this

light alerts the driver to the fact that the vehicle

Make sure to turn the light switch off when you

leave the vehicle.

Seat belt warning chime

The chime will sound for about 6 seconds unless

the drivers seat belt is securely fastened.

Instruments and controls 2-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SECURITY SYSTEMS

the meter comes on. The SECURITY indica-

tor light glows for about 30 seconds and then

blinks. The system is now activated. If, during

this 30 second time period, the door is

unlocked by the key or the keyfob, or the

ignition key is turned to ACC or ON, the

system will not activate.

Even when the driver and/or passengers

are in the vehicle, the system will activate

with all doors and hood locked and ignition

key off. Turn the ignition key to ACC to turn

the system off.

Vehicle security system operation

SIC2133

SIC2045

The security system will give the following alarm:

Your vehicle has two types of security systems,

as follows:

How to activate the vehicle security

system

The headlights blink and the horn sounds

intermittently.

Vehicle Security System

1. Close all windows.

The alarm automatically turns off after ap-

proximately 1 minute. However, the alarm

reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with

again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking

a door with the key, or by pressing the

UNLOCK button on the keyfob.

Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System

The system can be activated even if the

windows are open.

The security condition will be shown by the

security indicator light in the meter panel.

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.

3. Close and lock all doors and hood.

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides visual and

audio alarm signals if parts of the vehicle are

disturbed.

Lock all doors by pressing the LOCK button

on the keyfobor using the key. When using

the keyfob, the hazard indicators flash twice

to indicate all doors are locked.

The alarm is activated by:

Opening the door (including the back door)

without using the key or keyfob.

4. Confirm that the SECURITY indicator light in

Opening the hood.

2-16 Instruments and controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device

(which may have caused the interference)

separate from the registered Nissan Vehicle

Immobilizer System key.

How to stop alarm

The alarm will stop only by unlocking a door with

the key, or by pressing the UNLOCK button on

keyfob. The alarm will not stop if the ignition

switch is turned to ACC or ON.

If this procedure allows the engine to start,

NISSAN recommends placing the registered

Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key on a

separate key ring to avoid interference from

other devices.

If the system does not operate as de-

scribed above, have it checked by your

NISSAN dealer.

Statement related to section 15 of FCC

rules for Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-

tem (CONT ASSY-BCM, ANT ASSY-

IMMOBILIZER)

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System will not

allow the engine to start without the use of the

registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System

key.

SIC2045

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry

Canada. Operation is subject to the follow-

ing two conditions;

Security indicator light

This light blinks whenever the registered Nissan

Vehicle Immobilizer System key is removed or

turned to OFF, ACC or LOCK position. This

function indicates the security systems

equipped on the vehicle are operational.

If the engine fails to start using the registered

Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key, it may be

due to interference caused by another Nissan

Vehicle Immobilizer System key, an automated

toll road device or automated payment device on

the key ring. Restart the engine using the follow-

ing procedures:

(1) This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and (2) this device must accept

any interference received, including inter-

ference that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

If Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System is malfunc-

tioning, this light will remain on while the regis-

tered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System Key is

in the ON position.

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-

PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE MANUFAC-

TURE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD VOID

THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPERATE

THE EQUIPMENT.

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position

for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK

position and wait approximately 10 seconds.

If the light still remains on and/or the

engine will not start, see your NISSAN

dealer for Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-

3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again.

Instruments and controls 2-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND

WASHER SWITCH

tem service as soon as possible. Please

bring all Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-

tem keys that you have when visiting your

NISSAN dealer for service.

Push the lever up

to have one sweep

operation of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you

washer. Then the wiper will also operate several

times.

to operate the

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer so-

lution may freeze on the windshield and

obscure your vision which may lead to

an accident. Warm the windshield with

the defroster before you wash the wind-

shield.

SIC1958

The windshield wiper and washer operates

when the ignition key is in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the

following speed:

CAUTION

The following could damage the washer

system:

Intermittent — intermittent operation can be

adjusted by turning the knob toward k

(Slower) or k (Faster). Also, the intermittent

Do not operate the washer continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.

operation speed varies in accordance with

the vehicle speed. (For example, when the

vehicle speed is high, the intermittent opera-

tion speed will be faster.)

Do not operate the washer if the

reservoir tank is empty.

2 Low — continuous low speed operation

3 High — continuous high speed operation

2-18 Instruments and controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

REAR WINDOW WIPER AND

WASHER SWITCH

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE

MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH

CAUTION

If the rear window wiper operation is

interrupted by snow etc., the wiper

may stop moving to protect its motor.

If this occurs, turn the wiper switch to

OFF and remove the snow etc. on

and around the wiper arms. After

about 1 minute, turn the switch ON

again to operate the wiper.

Do not operate the washer continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.

SIC1959

SIC2046

Do not operate the washer if reser-

voir tank is empty.

The rear window wiper and washer operate

when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

To defog/defrost the rear window glass and

outside mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine

and push the switch on 1 . The indicator light

k will come on. Push the switch again to turn

Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position

to operate the wiper.

WARNING

the defroster off.

Intermittent — intermittent operation (not ad-

justable)

It will automatically turn off in approximately 15

minutes.

In freezing temperatures the washer so-

lution may freeze on the rear window

glass and obscure your vision. Warm the

rear window glass with the defroster

before you wash.

2 Low — continuous low speed operation

CAUTION

Push the switch forward

to operate the

washer. Then the wiper will also operate several

times.

When cleaning the inner side of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or

damage the rear window defroster.

Instruments and controls 2-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL

SWITCH

XENON HEADLIGHTS (if so

equipped)

The life of xenon headlights will be

shortened by frequent on-off operation.

It is generally desirable not to turn off

the headlights for short intervals (for

example, when the vehicle stops at a

traffic signal). Even when the daytime

running lights are active (Canada only),

the xenon headlights do not turn on.

This way the life of the xenon headlights

is not reduced.

WARNING

HIGH VOLTAGE

When xenon headlights are on, they

produce a high voltage. To prevent an

electric shock, never attempt to

modify or disassemble. Always have

your xenon headlights replaced at a

NISSAN dealer.

If the xenon headlight bulb is close to

burning out, the brightness will drasti-

cally decrease, the light will start blink-

ing, or the color of the light will become

reddish. If one or more of the above

signs appear, contact a NISSAN dealer.

SIC2047

Type A

HEADLIGHT SWITCH

Xenon headlights provide consider-

ably more light than conventional

headlights. If they are not correctly

aimed, they might temporarily blind

an oncoming driver or the driver

ahead of you and cause a serious

accident. If headlights are not aimed

correctly, immediately take your ve-

hicle to a NISSAN dealer and have

the headlights adjusted correctly.

Lighting

1 Turn the switch to the

position:

The front park, side marker, tail, license plate

and instrument lights will come on.

2 Turn the switch to the

position:

Headlights will come on and all the other

lights remain on.

When the xenon headlight is initially turned on,

its brightness or color varies slightly. However,

the color and brightness will soon stabilize.

2-20 Instruments and controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The autolight system can turn on the headlights

automatically when it is dark, turn off the head-

lights when it is light, and keep the headlights on

for up to 45 seconds after you turn the key to

OFF and open any door then close all the doors.

With Navigation system equipped models, the

headlight off time can be adjusted on the system

setting display. See the “4. Display screen,

heater, air conditioner and audio system” sec-

tion.

If the ignition switch is turned OFF and one of

the doors is opened and this condition is con-

tinued, the headlights remain ON for 5 minutes.

SIC1961

SIC2051

Type B

Autolight system (if so equipped)

The autolight system allows the headlights to be

set so they turn on and off automatically.

To set the autolight system:

1. Make sure the headlight switch is in the

AUTO position.

2. Turn the ignition key to ON.

3. The autolight system automatically turns the

headlights on and off.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch

to the OFF,

, or

position.

Instruments and controls 2-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Battery saver system

When the headlight switch is in the

position while the ignition switch is in

the ON position, the lights will automatically

turn off 5 minutes after the ignition switch has

been turned to the OFF position.

When the headlight switch remains in the

position after the lights auto-

matically turn off, the lights will turn on for 5

minutes when the headlight switch is turned

to the OFF position and then turn to the

position.

SIC2052

SIC2048

CAUTION

Be sure not to put anything on top of the

Headlight beam select

photo sensor k located on the top left-

Be sure to turn the light switch to the

OFF position when you leave the ve-

hicle for extended periods of time,

otherwise this could result in a dis-

charged battery.

To select the low beam, put the lever in the

neutral position as shown.

hand side of the instrument panel. The

photo sensor controls the autolamp; if it is

covered, the photo sensor reacts as if it is

dark and the headlights will illuminate.

To select the high beam, push the lever

forward while the switch is in the

po-

sition. Pull it back to select the low beam.

Never leave the light switch on when

the engine is not running for ex-

tended periods of time even if the

headlights turn off automatically.

Pulling the lever toward you will flash the

headlight high beam.

2-22 Instruments and controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

When traveling with no heavy load or on a flat

road, select position 0.

ately turning it to the ON position. This is not a

malfunction.

The daytime running lights will be turned off

when the headlight switch is turned to the AUTO

WARNING

(only when the headlights are lit) or

tion or when the fog light is turned on.

posi-

Xenon headlights are extremely bright

compared to conventional headlights. If

the xenon headlights hit the rearview

mirror of the vehicle ahead or the wind-

shield of the oncoming vehicle, the

driver of these vehicles may have diffi-

culty driving because of the brightness.

Use the headlight aiming control switch

to lower the light axis. See earlier in this

section for information on xenon head-

lights.

The daytime running lights will remain on until

the ignition switch is turned to the ACC or OFF

position.

WARNING

When the daytime running light system

is active, tail lights on your vehicle are

not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on

your headlights. Failure to do so could

cause an accident injuring yourself and

others.

SIC1911

Headlight aiming control (if so

equipped)

Depending on the number of occupants in the

vehicle and the load it is carrying, the headlight

axis may be higher than desired. If the vehicle is

traveling on a hilly road, the headlights may

directly hit the rearview mirror of the vehicle

ahead or the windshield of the oncoming vehicle.

The light axis can be lowered with the operation

of the switch.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM

(CANADA ONLY)

The daytime running lights automatically illumi-

nate when the engine is started with parking

brake released. The daytime running lights op-

erate with the headlight switch in the OFF

position or in the

position.

The larger the number designated on the switch,

the lower the axis.

The daytime running lights may come on after

turning the key to the OFF position and immedi-

Instruments and controls 2-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SIC2053

SIC2049

SIC2054

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS

CONTROL

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so

equipped)

k Turn signal

The instrument brightness control operates

when the light switch is in the or

position and the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight

Move the lever up or down to signal the turning

direction. When the turn is completed, the turn

signals cancel automatically.

switch to the

to the

position, then turn the switch

position. To turn them off, turn the

switch to the OFF position.

k Lane change signal

To adjust the brightness of instrument panel

lights, press the control switches located on the

left side of the meter panel. Pressing the upper

The headlights must be on for the fog lights to

operate (except for the daytime running light).

To indicate a lane change, move the lever up or

down to the point where lights begin flashing.

switch k will brighten the lights. The lower

switch k dims the lights. Repeatedly pressing

the lower switch will turn the lights off.

2-24 Instruments and controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HORN

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

SWITCH

Do not use the hazard warning flash-

ers while moving on the highway un-

less unusual circumstances force you

to drive so slowly that your vehicle

might become a hazard to other traf-

fic.

Turn signals do not work when the

hazard warning flasher lights are on.

The flasher will operate with the ignition switch in

any position.

SIC1447

SIC2055

Push the switch (located on the right side of the

meter panel) on to warn other drivers when you

must stop or park under emergency conditions.

All turn signal lights will flash.

To sound the horn, push the center pad upper

area of the steering wheel.

WARNING

Some state laws may prohibit the use of

the hazard warning flasher switch while

driving.

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so

could affect proper operation of the

supplemental front air bag system. Tam-

pering with the supplemental front air

bag system may result in serious per-

sonal injury.

WARNING

If stopping for an emergency, be sure

to move the vehicle well off the road.

Instruments and controls 2-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)

The indicator light in the switch k will

similar object. This may result in

damage to the heater.

illuminate when low or high is selected.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,

automatically turning the heater on and off.

The indicator light will remain on as long as

the switch is on.

Any liquid spilled on the heated seat

should be removed immediately with

a dry cloth.

3. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed, or

before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn

When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, thinner, or any similar ma-

terials.

the switch to the off position (center) 3 .

If any abnormalities are found or the

heated seat does not operate, turn

the switch off and have the system

checked by your NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

SIC2056

The battery could be discharged if

the seat heater is operated while the

engine is not running.

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters.

The switches located on the center console can

be operated independently (driver side seat k

Do not use the seat heater for ex-

tended periods or when no one is

using the seat.

and front passenger side seat k) of each other.

1. Start the engine.

Do not put anything on the seat

which insulates heat, such as a blan-

ket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Other-

wise, the seat may become over-

heated.

2. Select heat range.

1 For high heat, press the

of the switch.

(High) side

(Low) side

2 For low heat, press the

of the switch.

Do not place anything hard or heavy

on the seat or pierce it with a pin or

3 For no heat, the switch has a center OFF

position between low and high.

2-26 Instruments and controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL

(VDC) OFF SWITCH (if so

equipped)

POWER OUTLET

engine to turn ON the system. See “Vehicle

dynamic control (VDC) system” in the “5. Start-

ing and driving” section.

SIC1881

The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle

Dynamic Control (VDC) System ON for most

driving conditions.

When the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the

VDC system reduces the engine output to re-

duce wheel spin. The engine speed will be

reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to

the floor. If maximum engine power is needed to

free a stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To cancel the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

System, push the VDC OFF switch to turn off

the system. The

on.

indicator light will come

SIC2066

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Instruments and controls 2-27

STORAGE

The power outlet is for powering electrical ac-

cessories such as cellular telephones.

running. (If the engine is stopped,

this could result in a discharged bat-

tery.)

Located beside the glove box (if so

equipped):

Pull down the cover to open.

Avoid using when the air conditioner,

headlights or rear window defroster

is on.

Located inside the console box:

Pull to remove the cover to open.

Before inserting or disconnecting a

plug, be sure to turn off the power

switch of electrical accessory being

used or the ACC power of the vehicle.

Located the side of the luggage room (if so

equipped):

Pull up the cover to open.

Push the plug in as far as it will go. If

good contact is not made, the plug

may overheat or the internal tem-

perature fuse may blow.

CAUTION

SIC2057

Use caution as the socket and plug

may be hot during or immediately

after use.

COIN BOX

When not in use, be sure to replace

the cover. Do not allow water to con-

tact the socket.

WARNING

This power outlet is not designed for

use with a cigarette lighter unit.

The coin box should not be used while

driving so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation.

Do not use with accessories that ex-

ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power

draw. Do not use double adapters or

more than one electrical accessory.

To open, push the coin box lid

The inner tray can be removed

as illustrated.

Use only one power outlet at a time.

Use this power outlet with the engine

Do not place valuable items in the box.

Do not use the coin box as an ashtray.

2-28 Instruments and controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

If a conversation in a moving vehicle

requires you to take notes, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop

your vehicle before doing so.

To open, push the cellular phone holder lid

as illustrated.

The inner tray can be removed

as illustrated.

Do not place valuable items in the holder.

Do not use the cellular phone holder as an

ashtray.

SIC2058

SIC2070

CELLULAR PHONE HOLDER

CUP HOLDERS

WARNING

The cellular phone holder should not

be used while driving so full attention

may be given to vehicle operation.

The cup holder should not be used while

driving so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation.

A cellular telephone should not be

used while driving so full attention

may be given to vehicle operation.

Some jurisdictions prohibit the use

of cellular telephones while driving.

CAUTION

Avoid abrupt starting and braking

Instruments and controls 2-29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

when the cup holder is being used to

prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid

is hot, it can scald you or your pas-

senger.

Use only soft cups in the cup holder.

Hard objects can injure you in an

accident.

Front:

Push the cup holder lid k to open.

1 Install the bottom piece for taller size cups.

SIC2315

SIC2059

Install the reverse side of the bottom piece

up for shorter cups.

Rear:

Push

GLOVE BOX

to open the cup holder.

When locking or unlocking the glove box, use

the master key.

Use this flap for smaller bottles, or for bigger

bottles by flipping up.

The glove box may be opened by pulling the

handle.

Pull up the inner tray as illustrated to remove

for cleaning.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving

to help prevent injury in an accident or a

sudden stop.

2-30 Instruments and controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The inside of the console box lid is designed to

be used as a holder k such as pen, etc. There

is a power outlet k inside the console box.

Remove the inside tray k to store a large

object.

To lock the console box, turn the key to the

position. To unlock the console box, turn the key

to the position.

Push the button

and adjust the armrest

to the desired position.

SIC2208

CONSOLE BOX

used while driving so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

WARNING

The center console box should not be

Push the button k to open the console box lid.

Instruments and controls 2-31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WARNING

Properly secure all cargo to help pre-

vent it from sliding or shifting.

Be sure to secure hooks into the

retainers. The cargo restrained in the

net must not exceed 30 lb (13.6 kg) or

the net may not stay secured.

SIC2061

SIC2065

CARGO NET (if so equipped)

TONNEAU COVER (if so equipped)

The cargo net helps keep packages in the cargo

area from moving around while your vehicle is

driven.

The tonneau cover keeps the luggage compart-

ment contents hidden from the outside.

To open the tonneau cover, pull it out and hang

both sides on the hooks. To close the tonneau

cover, remove it from the hooks and put the hook

To install the cargo net, attach the hooks to the

retainers k on both sides.

k on the guide k then release it as illustrated.

To remove the cargo net, detach the hooks from

the cargo net retainers.

To open the subcover, pull out and hang both

sides on the hooks behind the rear seat head

restraint. To close the subcover, remove it from

the hooks and release it.

To remove the tonneau cover, pull the holder to

the opposite side 1 .

2-32 Instruments and controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WINDOWS

POWER WINDOWS

damaged.

WARNING

Never put anything on the tonneau

cover, no matter how small. Any ob-

ject on it could cause an injury in an

accident or sudden stop.

Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc. inside the vehicle

while it is in motion and before clos-

ing the windows. Use the window

lock switch to prevent unexpected

use of the power windows.

Close the tonneau and sub covers

when folding the rear seat.

Do not leave the tonneau cover in the

vehicle with it disengaged from the

holder.

Do not leave children unattended in-

side the vehicle. They could unknow-

ingly activate switches or controls

and become trapped in a window.

Unattended children could become

involved in serious accidents.

Properly secure all cargo to help pre-

vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the seat-

backs. In a sudden stop or collision,

unsecured cargo could cause per-

sonal injury.

The power windows operate when the ignition

key is in the ON position and for about 45

seconds, after the ignition key is turned to the

ACC or OFF position. If the driver’s door or the

front passenger’s door is opened during this

period of about 45 seconds, power to the

windows is canceled.

The top tether strap may be damaged

by contact with the tonneau cover or

items in the cargo area. Remove the

tonneau cover from the vehicle or

secure it and any cargo. Your child

could be seriously injured or killed in

a collision if the top tether strap is

Instruments and controls 2-33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SIC1891

SIC1892

SIC1893

Main power window switch (driver’s

Passenger side power window switch

Automatic operation

side)

The passenger side switch will open or close

only the corresponding window. To open or

close the window, hold the switch down or up.

To fully open or close the driver’s or front

passenger’s side window, completely push

down or pull up the switch and release it; it need

not be held. The window will automatically open

or close all the way. To stop the window, just

press or lift the switch on the opposite side.

To open or close the window, push down or pull

up the switch and hold it. The main switch (driver

side switches) will open or close all the win-

dows.

Locking passenger’s windows

When the lock button is pushed in, only the

driver side window can be opened or closed.

Push it in again to cancel.

Auto reverse function (For front

window)

If the control unit detects something caught in a

front window as it moves up, the window will be

immediately lowered.

2-34 Instruments and controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SUNROOF (if so equipped)

The auto reverse function can be activated when

a front window is closed by automatic operation

when the ignition key is in the ON position or for

about 45 seconds after the ignition key is turned

to the OFF position. The doors remain closed.

To close the roof, slide the switch to the

side 2 .

Sliding position of lid can be chosen according

to sliding amount of switch.

To fully open or close the roof, completely move

Depending on the environment or driving

conditions, the auto reverse function may

be activated if an impact or load similar to

something being caught in the window

occurs.

the switch to the

side.

Tilting the sunroof

To tilt up, push the

switch. When the roof is open, it will automati-

cally close and then tilt up. To tilt down the

sunroof, push the

is open, it will automatically close.

side

of the tilt

WARNING

side 4 . When the roof

SIC2062

There are some small distances imme-

diately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., in-

side the vehicle before closing the win-

dow.

Restarting the sunroof sliding switch

AUTOMATIC SUNROOF

The sliding switch will become inoperable after

the battery terminal is disconnected, the electri-

cal supply interrupted and/or some abnormality

detected. Use the following re-set procedure to

return sunroof operation to normal.

The sunroof will only operate when the ignition

key is in the ON position.

The automatic sunroof is operational for about

45 seconds, even if the ignition key is turned to

the ACC or OFF position. If the driver’s door or

the front passenger’s door is opened during this

period of about 45 seconds, power to the

sunroof is canceled.

1. Keep pushing the tilting switch toward tilt UP.

2. After the lid has tilted up gradually, it will

automatically close all the way, then return to

normal operation.

Sliding the sunroof

Auto reverse function (When closing

the sunroof)

To open the roof, slide the switch to the

side 1 . When the roof is tilted up, it will

automatically tilt down and then open.

If the control unit detects something caught in

Instruments and controls 2-35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

the sunroof as it moves to the front or tilts down,

the sunroof will immediately open backward or

tilt up.

side the vehicle before closing the

sunroof.

of the opening while the vehicle is in

motion or while the sunroof is clos-

ing.

The auto reverse function can be activated when

the sunroof is closed by automatic operation

when the ignition key is in the ON position or for

about 45 seconds after the ignition key is turned

to the OFF position.

Sun shade

Open or close the sun shade by sliding it

backward or forward.

CAUTION

The shade will open automatically when the

sunroof is opened. However, it must be closed

manually.

Remove water drops, snow, ice or

sand from the sunroof before open-

ing.

Depending on the environment or driving

conditions, the auto reverse function may

be activated if an impact or load similar to

something being caught in the sunroof

occurs.

Comfortable position (

)

¼ Do not place any heavy object on the

sunroof or surrounding area.

Depending on the driving speed and air recircu-

lating conditions, wind noise may occur when

the sunroof is fully opened. Closing the sunroof

If the auto reverse function malfunctions and

repeats opening or tilting up the sunroof, keep

pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds

after it happens, then the sunroof will fully close

gradually. In this case, make sure nothing is

caught in the sunroof.

If the sunroof does not close

one step toward the front position k from full

Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the

sunroof.

open will decrease the wind noise.

WARNING

In an accident you could be thrown

from the vehicle through an open

sunroof. Always use seat belts and

child restraints.

There are some small distances imme-

diately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., in-

Do not allow anyone to stand up or

extend any portion of their body out

2-36 Instruments and controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INTERIOR LIGHTS

closed and the ignition switch is in the OFF or

ACC position.

Locking or unlocking with the keyfob, a key or

the lock-unlock switch.

Inserting or removing a key from the ignition

switch

The driver’s door is opened and then closed

while the key is removed from the ignition

switch.

These lights will turn on again when any of the

above operations is performed after the lights

have turned off automatically. (The lights will turn

off 30 minutes after the latest operation of the

above as well.)

The key is removed from the ignition switch

while all doors are closed.

The ceiling light will turn off while the 30 second

timer is activated, when:

The driver’s door is locked by the keyfob, a

key, or the lock-unlock switch.

CAUTION

Turn off the ceiling, map, rear and

vanity mirror lights when you leave

the vehicle.

The ignition switch is turned ON.

SIC2063

When the ceiling light switch or map light

switch or rear light switch is in the ON

position, the ceiling, map, rear and vanity

mirror lights will automatically turn off 30

minutes after the ignition switch has been

turned to the ACC or OFF position. To turn

on the light again, insert the key into the

ignition switch and move it to the ON

position.

CEILING LIGHT

The ceiling light has a three-position switch.

Do not use for extended periods of

time with the engine stopped. This

could result in a discharged battery.

When the switch is in the ON position 1 , the

light will illuminate.

When the switch is in the OFF position 2 , the

light will turn off.

When the switch is in the DOOR position 3 ,

the light will illuminate when a door is opened.

After the above procedure, the ceiling, map, rear

and vanity mirror lights will automatically turn off

30 minutes after the latest operation of the

following with the ignition switch in the ACC or

OFF position:

The light will stay on for about 30 seconds when:

The doors are unlocked by the keyfob, a key

or the lock-unlock switch while all doors are

Opening or closing any door

Instruments and controls 2-37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

After the above procedure, the ceiling, map, rear

or vanity mirror lights will automatically turn off

30 minutes after the latest operation of the

following with the ignition switch in the ACC or

OFF position:

Opening or closing any door

Locking or unlocking with the keyfob, a key or

the lock-unlock switch.

Inserting or removing a key from the ignition

switch

These lights will turn on again when any of the

above operations is performed after the lights

have turned off automatically. (The lights will turn

off 30 minutes after the latest operation of the

above as well.)

SIC2068

SIC2069

Front

Rear

MAP LIGHT

REAR LIGHT

To turn on the light, push the plastic surface k

The rear personal light has a three-position

switch. (k: DOOR, k: OFF, k: ON)

CAUTION

of the light. Push it again to turn off the light.

When the switch is in the DOOR position k,

Turn off the ceiling, map, rear and

vanity mirror lights when you leave

the vehicle.

the light will illuminate when a door is opened.

When the ceiling light or the map light

switch or rear light switch is in the ON

position, the ceiling, map, rear and vanity

mirror lights will automatically turn off 30

minutes after the ignition switch has been

turned to the OFF position. To turn on the

light again, insert the key into the ignition

switch and move it to the ONposition.

Do not use for extended periods of

time with the engine stopped. This

could result in a discharged battery.

2-38 Instruments and controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VANITY MIRROR LIGHT (if so

equipped)

HomeLink UNIVERSAL

TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver provides a

convenient way to consolidate the functions of

up to three individual hand-held transmitters into

one built-in device.

HomeLink Universal Transceiver:

Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)

devices such as garage doors, gates, home

and office lighting, entry door locks and se-

curity systems.

Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No

separate batteries are required. If the vehi-

cle’s battery is discharged or is discon-

nected, HomeLink will retain all program-

ming.

SIC2131

SIC2064

The light on the vanity mirror will turn on when

the cover on the vanity mirror is opened.

LUGGAGE LIGHT

Once the HomeLink Universal Transceiver

is programmed, retain the original trans-

mitter for future programming procedures

(i.e., new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of

the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink

Universal Transceiver buttons should be

erased for security purposes. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Programming

HomeLink ” later in this section.

When the switch is in the ON position k, the

light illuminates while the back door is opened.

When the back door is closed, the light will go

off.

When the ceiling light or the map light

switch or rear light switch is in the ON

position, the ceiling, map, rear and vanity

mirror lights will automatically turn off 30

minutes after the ignition switch has been

turned to the OFF position. To turn on the

light again, insert the key into the ignition

switch and move it to the ONposition.

When the switch is in the OFF position k, the

light will turn off.

Instruments and controls 2-39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROGRAMMING HomeLink

WARNING

To program your HomeLink Transceiver to op-

erate a garage door, gate, or entry door opener,

home or office lighting, you need to be at the

same location as the device. Note: Garage door

openers (manufactured after 1996) have “rolling

code protection”. To program a garage door

opener equipped with “rolling code protection”;

you will need to use a ladder to get up to the

garage door opener motor to be able to access

the “smart or learn” program button.

Do not use the HomeLink Universal

Transceiver with any garage door

opener that lacks safety stop and

reverse features as required by fed-

eral safety standards. (These stan-

dards became effective for opener

models manufactured after April 1,

1982). A garage door opener which

cannot detect an object in the path of

a closing garage door and then auto-

matically stop and reverse, does not

meet current federal safety stan-

dards. Using a garage door opener

without these features increases the

risk of serious injury or death.

SIC2071

1. To begin, press and hold the

outer

HomeLink buttons (to clear the memory)

until the indicator light blinks slowly (after 20

seconds). Release both buttons.

2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter

1-3 inches away from the HomeLink sur-

face.

During programming, your garage

door or gate may open or close.

Make sure that people and objects

are clear of the garage door or gate

that you are programming.

Your vehicle’s engine should be

turned off while programming the

HomeLink Universal Transceiver.

2-40 Instruments and controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

grammed HomeLink button

when the device begins to activate.

releasing

button, firmly press and release the

HomeLink button you’ve just programmed.

Press and release the HomeLink button up

to three times to complete the training.

5. If the indicator light on the HomeLink blinks

rapidly for two seconds and then turns solid,

HomeLink has picked up a “rolling code”

garage door opener signal. You will need to

proceed with the next steps to train the

HomeLink to complete the programming

which may require a ladder and another

person for convenience.

8. Your HomeLink button should now be pro-

grammed. (To program the remaining

HomeLink buttons for additional door or

gate openers, follow steps 2 through 8 only.)

NOTE:

Do not repeat step one unless you want to

6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn”

program button located on the garage door

opener’s motor to activate the “training

mode”. This button is usually located near the

antenna wire that hangs down from the mo-

tor. If the wire originates from under a light

lens, you will need to remove the lens to

access the program button.

“clear”

all

previously

programmed

HomeLink buttons).

SIC2072

If you have any questions or are having difficulty

programming your HomeLink buttons, please

3. Using both hands, simultaneously press and

hold both the HomeLink button you want to

program and the hand-held transmitter but-

ton.

refer to the HomeLink

website at:

www.homelink.com or call 1-800-NISSAN-1.

PROGRAMMING HomeLink FOR

CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has

been completed.

NOTE:

Once you have pressed and released the

program button on the garage door open-

er’s motor and the “training light” is lit, you

have 30 seconds in which to perform step

7. Use the help of a second person for

convenience to assist when performing

this step.

4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator

light on the HomeLink flashes, changing

from a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashing

blink”. This could take up to 90 seconds.

When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both

buttons may be released. The rapidly flashing

light indicates successful programming. To

activate the garage door or other pro-

grammed device, press and hold the pro-

Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand-

held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2

seconds. To program your hand-held transmitter

to HomeLink , continue to press and hold the

HomeLink button (note steps 2 through 4

under “Programming HomeLink ”) while you

press and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held

transmitter every 2 seconds until the indicator

7. Quickly within 30 seconds of pressing and

releasing the garage door opener program

Instruments and controls 2-41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

light flashes rapidly (indicating successful pro-

gramming).

press and hold both the HomeLink and

hand-held transmitter buttons without inter-

ruption.

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE

HomeLink BUTTON

NOTE:

To reprogram a HomeLink Universal Trans-

ceiver button, complete the following.

position the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5

inches (50 to 127 mm) away from the

HomeLink surface. Hold the transmitter in

that position for up to 15 seconds. If

HomeLink is not programmed within that

time, try holding the transmitter in another

position - keeping the indicator light in view at

all times.

If programming a garage door opener, etc.,

it is advised to unplug the device during

the “cycling” process to prevent possible

damage to the garage door opener compo-

nents.

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink but-

ton. Do not release the button until step 4

has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flash

slowly (after 20 seconds), position the hand-

held transmitter 2 to 5 inches (50 to 127 mm)

away from the HomeLink surface.

OPERATING THE HomeLink

UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

If you continue to have programming difficulties,

please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs

Department. The phone numbers are located in

the Foreword of this Owner’s Manual.

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver (once

programmed) may now be used to activate the

garage door, etc. To operate, simply press the

appropriate programmed HomeLink Universal

Transceiver button. The red indicator light will

illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.

3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter

button.

4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash, first

slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator

light begins to flash rapidly, release both

buttons.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED

INFORMATION

Individual buttons cannot be cleared, however to

clear all programming, press and hold the two

outside buttons and release when the indicator

light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE

DIAGNOSIS

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver button

has now been reprogrammed. The new device

can be activated by pushing the HomeLink

button that was just programmed. This proce-

dure will not affect any other programmed

HomeLink buttons.

If the HomeLink does not quickly learn the

hand-held transmitter information:

replace the hand-held transmitter batteries

with new batteries.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

position the hand-held transmitter with its

battery area facing away from the HomeLink

surface.

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the

codes of any non-rolling code device that has

2-42 Instruments and controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

been programmed into HomeLink . Consult the

Owner’s Manual of each device or call the

manufacturer or dealer of those devices for

additional information.

When your vehicle is recovered, you will

need to reprogram the HomeLink Univer-

sal Transceiver with your new transmitter

information.

FCC Notice:

This device complies with FCC rules part

15. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions: (1) This device may not

cause harmful interference and (2) This

device must accept any interference that

may be received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

The transmitter has been tested and com-

plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for com-

pliance could void the user’s authority to

operate the device.

DOC: ISTC 1763K1313

FCC I.D.: CB2V67690

Instruments and controls 2-43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MEMO

2-44 Instruments and controls

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys........................................................................................... 3-2

Nissan vehicle immobilizer system (NVIS) keys....... 3-2

Doors......................................................................................... 3-3

Locking with key............................................................... 3-3

Locking with inside lock knob...................................... 3-4

Locking with power door lock switch......................... 3-4

Child safety rear door lock ............................................ 3-4

Remote keyless entry system ............................................. 3-5

How to use remote keyless entry system.................. 3-5

Battery replacement ........................................................ 3-8

Hood ......................................................................................... 3-9

Back door ................................................................................ 3-9

Fuel filler lid........................................................................... 3-11

Open the filler lid........................................................... 3-11

Fuel filler cap .................................................................. 3-11

Steering wheel ..................................................................... 3-13

Tilt operation................................................................... 3-13

Pedal position adjustment (if so equipped).................. 3-13

Sun visors.............................................................................. 3-14

Mirrors .................................................................................... 3-14

Inside mirror .................................................................... 3-14

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror (if so

equipped)......................................................................... 3-15

Outside mirrors .............................................................. 3-15

Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) ................. 3-16

Entry/exit function.......................................................... 3-16

Memory storage ............................................................. 3-17

System operation........................................................... 3-18

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KEYS

Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your

vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip in

the key head.

could affect system function.

The master key can be used for all the locks.

The valet key cannot be used for glove box lock.

To protect belongings when you leave a key with

someone, give them the valet key only.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System KEY — Mas-

ter and Valet keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is not

necessary when you need extra Nissan Vehicle

Immobilizer System keys. Your NISSAN dealer

can duplicate it. As many as 5 NVIS keys can be

used with one vehicle. You should bring all NVIS

keys that you have to your NISSAN dealer for

registration. This is because the registration

process will erase the memory of all key codes

previously registered into the Nissan Vehicle

Immobilizer System. After the registration pro-

cess, these components will only recognize keys

coded into the Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-

tem (NVIS) during registration. Any key that is

not given to your dealer at the time of registration

will no longer be able to start your vehicle.

SPA1379

A key number plate is supplied with your keys.

Record the key number and keep it in a safe

place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If

you lose your keys, see an NISSAN dealer for

duplicates by using the key number.

A key number is necessary when you have lost

all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If

you still have a key, your NISSAN dealer can

duplicate it.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM (NVIS) KEYS

Do not allow the immobilizer system key,

which contains an electrical transponder,

to come into contact with salt water. This

You can only drive your vehicle using the master

or valet keys which are registered to the Nissan

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DOORS

within 5 seconds will unlock all doors and fuel

filler lid.

WARNING

Opening and closing front windows

Always have the doors locked while

driving. Along with the use of seat

belts, this provides greater safety in

the event of an accident by helping to

prevent persons from being thrown

from the vehicle. This also helps keep

children and others from uninten-

tionally opening the doors, and will

help keep out intruders.

Turn the driver’s door key to the unlock position

and hold for about 1 second, the front windows

will begin to lower.

To stop opening, turn the key to the neutral

position.

To close the front windows with the door key

cylinder, turn the key to the lock position and

hold for about 1 second.

To stop closing, turn the key to the neutral

position.

Before opening any door, always

look for and avoid oncoming traffic.

SPA1575

LOCKING WITH KEY

Power

In the event of a hand in the way, or other

obstruction, the auto reverse function will acti-

vate.

Do not leave children unattended in-

side the vehicle. They could unknow-

ingly activate switches or controls.

Unattended children could become

involved in serious accidents.

The power door lock system allows you to lock

or unlock all doors simultaneously.

Turning the driver’s door key to the front of

the vehicle will lock all doors (including the

back door) and fuel filler lid.

Turning the driver’s door key one time to the

rear of the vehicle will unlock the driver’s

door. From that position, returning the key to

neutral (where the key can only be removed

and inserted) and turning it to the rear again

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPA1422

SPA1576

SPA1577

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

KNOB

LOCK SWITCH

Child safety locking helps prevent doors from

being opened accidentally, especially when

small children are in the vehicle.

All door and fuel filler lid locks will be engaged

when the power door lock switch is moved to the

LOCK position with the driver’s or front passen-

ger’s door open. Then close the door and all

doors will be locked.

To individually lock the doors, move the inside

lock knobto the LOCK position, then close the

door. To unlock, pull the inside lock knobup to

the UNLOCK position.

When the lever is in the LOCK position, the

rear door can be opened only from the

outside.

The front doors will automatically be unlocked

and you can open the door by pulling the inside

door handle.

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch (driver or front

passenger) is moved to the LOCK position with

the key in the ignition and any door open, all

doors will lock and unlock automatically. This

helps to prevent the keys from being accidentally

locked inside the vehicle.

When locking the door without a key, be

sure not to leave the key inside the vehicle.

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY

SYSTEM

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors (including

the back door) and fuel filler lid and activate the

panic alarm by using the keyfob from outside the

vehicle.

LOCK button is pushed, the hazard indicator

flashes twice and the horn chirps once. When

the UNLOCK button is pushed, the hazard indi-

cator flashes once.

Do not allow the keyfob to become

wet.

Do not drop the keyfob.

Before locking the doors, make sure the

key is not left in the vehicle.

If hazard indicator and horn mode is not neces-

sary, you can switch to hazard indicator only

mode by following the switching procedure.

Do not strike the keyfob sharply

against another object.

The keyfobcan operate at a distance of approxi-

mately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. (The

effective distance depends upon the conditions

around the vehicle.)

As many as five keyfobs can be used with one

vehicle. For information concerning the purchase

and use of additional keyfobs, contact your

NISSAN dealer.

Do not place the keyfob for an ex-

tended period in an area where tem-

peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

In hazard indicator only mode, when the LOCK

button is pushed, the hazard indicator flashes

twice. When the UNLOCK button is pushed,

neither the hazard indicator nor the horn oper-

ates.

If a keyfob is lost or stolen, NISSAN

recommends erasing the ID code of that

keyfob. This will prevent the keyfob

from unauthorized use to unlock the

vehicle. For information regarding the

The keyfobwill not function when:

the battery is discharged,

erasing procedure, please contact

NISSAN dealer.

the distance between the vehicle and the

keyfobis over 33 ft (10 m).

The panic alarm will not activate when the

key is in the ignition switch.

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS

ENTRY SYSTEM

Setting hazard indicator and horn

mode

CAUTION

The following conditions or occurrences

will damage the keyfob.

The factory setting of the remote keyless entry

system is in hazard indicator and horn mode.

In hazard indicator and horn mode, when the

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

When the LOCK button is pushed with all

doors and fuel filler lid locked, the hazard

indicator flashes twice and the horn chirps

once as a reminder that the doors and fuel

filler lid are already locked.

*1: Doors and fuel filler lid lock with the keyfob

while a key is in the ignition switch. How-

ever, the panic alarm will not activate when

the key is in the ignition switch.

*2: Doors and fuel filler lid lock with the keyfob

while any door is open. However, hazard

indicator and horn mode will not function.

SPA1260

(Switching procedure)

Locking doors and fuel filler lid

Push the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the

keyfobsimultaneously for more than 2 seconds

to switch from one mode to the other.

1. Remove the ignition key.*1

2. Close all the doors and fuel filler lid.*2

3. Push the LOCK button on the keyfob.

4. All the doors and fuel filler lid will lock.

When pushing the buttons to set hazard indica-

tor only mode, the hazard indicator flashes 3

times.

All of the doors will lock when the LOCK

button on the keyfob is pushed even

though a door remains open and/or the

ignition key is in the ONposition.

When pushing the buttons to set hazard indica-

tor and horn mode, the hazard indicator flashes

once and the horn chirps once.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the

horn chirps once.

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2. Push the UNLOCK button on the keyfob

again within 5 seconds.

To stop lowering the windows, release the UN-

LOCK button.

To start lowering the windows, press the UN-

LOCK button again for 3 more seconds.

All doors unlock

The hazard indicator flashes once if all doors

are completely closed.

This function will operate after the ignition switch

is off and 45 seconds passed or either the front

door is opened.

If the following operation is not carried out

within minute after pressing the

UNLOCK button, all doors will be locked

automatically.

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,

you may activate the alarm to call attention as

follows:

any door is opened.

the ignition key is turned to the ON

position

1. Push the PANIC button on the keyfob for

SPA1397

longer than 0.5 seconds.

The interior light can be turned off without

waiting for 30 seconds by turning the ignition

switch to the ON position or by locking the

doors with the keyfob.

Unlocking doors

2. The theft warning alarm and headlights will

stay on for 30 seconds.

1. Push the UNLOCK button on the keyfob

once.

3. The panic alarm stops when:

The driver’s door and fuel filler lid unlocks

It has run for 30 seconds, or

Opening the front window

Push the UNLOCK button on the keyfob.

The driver’s door will unlock.

The hazard indicator flashes once if all doors

and fuel filler lid are completely closed with

the ignition key in any position except the ON

position.

The LOCK or the UNLOCK button is

pressed, or

The panic button is pushed on the keyfob for

more than 0.5 seconds.

Continue to press the UNLOCK button for 3

seconds. The driver’s and front passenger’s

windows will be lowered.

The interior light turns on and the light timer

activates for 30 seconds when the switch is

in the DOOR position with the ignition key in

any position except the ON position.

Continue to press the UNLOCK button until

windows are fully open.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Recommended battery: Sanyo CR2025 or

equivalent

could void the user’s authority to operate

the equipment. This device complies with

Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions: (1) This de-

vice may not cause harmful interference,

and (2) this device must accept any inter-

ference received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation of the

device.

Make sure that the ⊕ side faces the

bottom case.

3. Close the lid securely.

4. Push the keyfobbutton two or three times to

check its operation.

See your NISSAN dealer if you need any assis-

tance for replacement.

If the battery is removed for any reason

other than replacement, perform the step 4

above.

Be careful not to touch a circuit board

and a battery terminal.

An improperly disposed battery can

harm the environment. Always confirm

local regulations for battery disposal.

The keyfob is water-resistant; however,

if it does get wet, immediately wipe

completely dry.

SPA1374

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

Replace the battery as follows:

1. Open the lid using a suitable tool.

When changing batteries, do not let

dust or oil get on the keyfob.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the manufacturer compliance

2. Replace the battery with a new one.

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HOOD

BACK DOOR

SPA1578

SPA1579

1. Pull the hood lock release handle

located

The power door lock system allows you to

lock or unlock all doors including the back

door simultaneously.

below the instrument panel; the hood will

then spring up slightly.

WARNING

Make sure the hood is completely

closed and latched before driving.

Failure to do so could cause the hood

to fly open and result in an accident.

2. Move the lever

at the front of the hood

with your fingertips and raise the hood.

Pull the opener handle to open the back door.

3. When closing the hood, slowly close the

hood and make sure it locks into place.

WARNING

If you see steam or smoke coming

from the engine compartment, to

avoid injury do not open the hood.

Do not drive with the back door open.

This could allow dangerous exhaust

gases to be drawn into the vehicle. See

“Precautions when starting and driving”

in the “5. Starting and driving” section

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

for exhaust gas.

WARNING

Always check the back door has been

closed securely to prevent it from

opening while driving.

Do not drive with the back door open.

This could allow dangerous exhaust

gases to be drawn into the vehicle.

SPA1617

To lock or unlock the back door

If the back door cannot be locked or unlocked

with the door lock switch or remote controller

due to a discharged battery, follow the next

steps.

1. Remove the cover inside of the back door

with a suitable tool.

2. Move the lever as illustrated to lock or unlock.

Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as pos-

sible.

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUEL FILLER LID

SPA1580

SPA1581

OPEN THE FILLER LID

FUEL FILLER CAP

ously injured if it is misused or mis-

handled. Always stop the engine and

do not smoke or allow open flames

or sparks near the vehicle when refu-

eling.

To open the fuel filler lid, unlock it using one of

the following operations, then push the right-

The fuel filler cap is a ratcheting type. Tighten the

cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks are heard.

hand side of the lid k.

Put the fuel filler cap on the cap holder while

refueling.

Press the unlock button on the keyfob once.

Insert the key into the door lock cylinder and

turn the door key clockwise twice.

Fuel may be under pressure. Turn the

cap a third of a turn, and wait for any

hissing sound to stop to prevent fuel

from spraying out and possible per-

sonal injury. Then remove the cap.

WARNING

Press the power door lock switch to the

unlock side.

Gasoline is extremely flammable and

highly explosive under certain condi-

tions. You could be burned or seri-

To lock, close the fuel filler lid and lock the doors.

Do not attempt to top off the fuel

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts

off automatically.

Continued refueling may cause fuel

overflow, resulting in fuel spray and

possibly a fire.

— Keep the pump nozzle in contact

with the container while you are

filling it.

have the vehicle inspected by an au-

thorized NISSAN dealer.

For additional information, see the

“Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)” in

the “2. Instruments and controls”

section.

— Use only approved portable fuel

containers for flammable liquid.

Use only an original equipment type

fuel filler cap as a replacement. It has

a built-in safety valve needed for

proper operation of the fuel system

and emission control system. An in-

correct cap can result in a serious

malfunction and possible injury. It

Never pour fuel into the throttle body

to attempt to start your vehicle.

CAUTION

If fuel is spilled on the car body, flush

it away with water to avoid paint

damage.

could also cause the

malfunc-

tion indicator lamp to come on.

Do not fill a portable fuel container in

the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity

can cause an explosion of flammable

liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or

trailer. To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death when filling portable

fuel containers:

Tighten until the fuel filler cap clicks.

Failure to tighten the fuel filler cap

properly may cause the

function indicator lamp (MIL) to illu-

minate. If the lamp illuminates

mal-

because the fuel filler cap is loose or

missing, tighten or install the cap and

continue to drive the vehicle. The

lamp should turn off after a few

— Always place the container on the

ground when filling.

driving trips. If the

not turn off after a few driving trips,

lamp does

— Do not use electronic devices

while filling.

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STEERING WHEEL

PEDAL POSITIONADJUSTMENT

(if so equipped)

of your vehicle and cause an acci-

dent.

Do not put anything on or near the

steering wheel when tilting.

SPA1582

SPA1574

The accelerator and brake pedals can be ad-

justed for driving comfort.

TILT OPERATION

The steering wheel will pop up when the lock

lever is pulled as illustrated 1 .

Use the pedal adjusting switch to adjust the

brake and accelerator pedal position forward

Keep holding the lock lever and adjust the

steering wheel to the desired position 2 .

or backward 2 . Pedal adjustment can only be

performed when:

Release the lock lever to lock the steering wheel.

Ignition switch is in the OFF or ACC position,

Ignition switch is ON and the selector lever is

in the P (Park) position

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel

while driving. You could lose control

The brake and accelerator pedals cannot be

adjusted separately.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SUNVISORS

MIRRORS

CAUTION

Do not adjust the pedal position with

your foot on the pedal.

SPA1583

PD1006M

INSIDE MIRROR

CAUTION

The night position will reduce glare from the

headlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Store the main sun visor after storing

the extension sun visor.

WARNING

Use the night position only when neces-

sary, because it reduces rear view clar-

ity.

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

“2. Instruments and controls” section.

SPA1448

SPA1449A

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE INSIDE

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

MIRROR (if so equipped)

WARNING

The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-

cally changes reflection according to the inten-

sity of the headlights of the vehicle following you.

Objects viewed in the outside mirror on

the passenger side are closer than they

appear. Be careful when moving to the

right. Using only this mirror could cause

an accident. Use inside mirror or glance

over your shoulder to properly judge

distances to other objects.

When the inside MIRROR switch is in the ON

position (The Auto indicator light will illuminate),

excessive glare from the headlights of the ve-

hicle behind you will be reduced. When the

switch of the inside mirror is in the OFF position,

the inside mirror will operate normally.

For the HomeLink Universal Transceiver and

the compass display, see the description in the

The outside mirror will operate only when the

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER

(if so equipped)

The automatic drive positioner system has two

features:

ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Move the switch to right k or left k to select

the right or left outside mirror, then adjust the

mirror to the desired position by pushing the

Entry/exit function

Memory storage

button k.

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION

This system is designed so that the driver’s seat,

pedals (Brake, Accelerator) and outside mirrors

will automatically move when the selector lever is

in the P (Park) position. This allows the driver to

get into and out of the driver’s seat more easily.

The driver’s seat will slide backward:

MPA0008

When the key is removed from the ignition

switch.

Foldable outside mirrors

When the driver’s door is opened with the

key turned to LOCK.

Fold the outside mirror by pushing it toward the

rear of the vehicle.

When the key is turned from ACC to LOCK

with the driver’s door open while the selector

lever is in the P (Park) position.

The driver’s seat will return to the previous

position:

When the key is inserted into the ignition

switch.

When the driver’s door is closed with the key

turned to LOCK.

When the key is turned from ACC to ON

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

while the selector lever is in the P (Park)

position.

and supplemental air bags” section and

“Pedal position adjustment” and “Outside

mirrors” earlier in this section.

The entry/exit feature can be adjusted or can-

celed. See “Display screen, heater, air condi-

tioner and audio systems” section of this manual.

During this step, do not turn the ignition to

any positions other than ON.

4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds,

push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for at

least 1 second.

The indicator light for the pushed memory

switch will come on and stay on for approxi-

mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch.

After the indicator light goes off, the selected

positions are stored in the selected memory

(1 or 2).

SPA1584

MEMORY STORAGE

If memory is stored in the same memory switch,

the previous memory will be deleted.

Two positions for the driver’s seat, pedals (Brake

and Accelerator) and outside mirrors can be

stored in the automatic drive positioner memory.

Follow these procedures to use the memory

system.

Linking a keyfobto a stored memory

position

A keyfobcan be linked to a stored memory

position with the following procedure.

1. Set the selector lever to the P (Park) position.

2. Turn the ignition ON.

1. Follow the steps for storing a memory posi-

tion.

3. Adjust the driver’s seat, pedals (Brake and

Accelerator) and outside mirrors to the de-

sired positions by manually operating each

adjusting switch. For additional information,

see “Seats” in the “Safety — Seats, seat belts

2. While the indicator light for the memory

switch being set is illuminated for 5 seconds,

press the unlock button on the keyfob. The

indicator light will blink. After the indicator

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

light goes off, the keyfobis linked to that

memory setting.

2. Turn the ignition ON.

3. Push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for at

least 1 second.

With the key removed from the ignition switch,

press the unlock button on the keyfob. The

driver’s seat, pedals (Brake and Accelerator)

and outside mirrors will move to the memorized

position.

The driver’s seat, pedals (Brake and Accel-

erator) and outside mirrors will move to the

memorized position with the indicator light

flashing, and then the light will stay on for

approximately 5 seconds.

Confirming memory storage

SYSTEM OPERATION

Turn the ignition ON and push the SET

switch. If the main memory has not been

stored, the indicator light will come on for

approximately 0.5 seconds. When the

memory has stored the position, the indicator

light will stay on for approximately 5 seconds.

The automatic drive positioner system will not

work or will stop operating under the following

conditions:

when the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7

km/h).

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the

fuse blows, the memory will be canceled. In

such a case, reset the desired positions

using the following procedures.

when any two or more of the memory

switches are simultaneously pushed while

the automatic drive positioner is operating.

when the adjusting switch for the driver’s

seat is turned on while the automatic drive

positioner is operating.

1. Open and close the driver’s door more than

two times with the ignition key in the LOCK

position.

when the memory switch (1 or 2) is not

pushed for at least 1 second.

2. Reset the desired position using the previous

procedure.

when the seat has been already moved to the

memorized position.

Selecting the memorized position

1. Set the sift selector lever to the P (Park)

position.

when no seat position is stored in the

memory switch.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MEMO

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MEMO

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and

audio systems

Safety note .............................................................................. 4-2

Control panel buttons — without navigation system.... 4-2

Names of the components ............................................ 4-3

How to use joystick and “ENTER” button................. 4-3

How to use “PREV” button........................................... 4-3

How to use “TRIP” button............................................. 4-3

How to use “FUEL ECON” button.............................. 4-4

Clock ................................................................................... 4-4

How to use “E/M” button .............................................. 4-4

How to use “MAINT” (Maintenance) button ............. 4-5

How to use “SETTING” button.................................... 4-5

“DAY/NIGHT” button...................................................... 4-7

Control panel buttons — with navigation system.......... 4-7

Names of the components ............................................ 4-8

How to use joystick and “ENTER” button................. 4-8

How to use “PREV” button........................................... 4-8

Setting up the start-up screen ..................................... 4-8

How to use the “TRIP” button...................................... 4-8

How to use the “SETTING” button .......................... 4-11

“DAY/NIGHT” button.................................................... 4-15

Ventilators.............................................................................. 4-16

Heater and air conditioner (Automatic) ......................... 4-16

Automatic operation...................................................... 4-17

Manual operation ........................................................... 4-18

Operating tips................................................................. 4-19

In-cabin microfilter......................................................... 4-19

Servicing air conditioner.................................................... 4-20

Audio system........................................................................ 4-20

FM radio reception........................................................ 4-21

AM radio reception ....................................................... 4-21

Satellite radio reception............................................... 4-21

Audio operation precautions....................................... 4-21

FM-AM radio with cassette player and compact disc

(CD) player (Type A)/CD changer (Type B) .......... 4-25

CD care and cleaning .................................................. 4-31

Steering switch for audio control (if so

equipped)......................................................................... 4-32

Antenna............................................................................ 4-33

Car phone or CB radio .................................................... 4-33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SAFETY NOTE

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —

WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM

WARNING

Positioning of the heating or air con-

ditioning controls and display con-

trols should not be done while driv-

ing, so that full attention may be

given to the driving operation.

Do not disassemble or modify this

system. Doing so may result in acci-

dents, fire, or electrical shock.

Do not use this system if you notice

any abnormality, such as a frozen

screen or lack of sound. Continued

use of the system may result in acci-

dent, fire or electric shock.

In case you notice any foreign object

in the system hardware, spill liquid

on it, or notice smoke or smell com-

ing from it, stop using the system

immediately and contact your near-

est NISSAN dealer. Ignoring such

conditions may lead to accidents,

fire, or electric shock.

SAA0795

4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Make sure the engine is running before using

this system.

8. JOYSTICK and “ENTER” push button; refer

to page 4-3.

9. “PREV” previous button; refer to page 4-3.

Using the system with the engine off (igni-

tion ONor ACC) for extended periods will

drain the battery power, and the engine

may not start.

10.“DAY/NIGHT” brightness control button; re-

fer to page 4-7.

To turn off the screen, push the “DAY/NIGHT”

button for more than approximately 1.5 seconds.

The screen will change to “CONFIRM DISPLAY

OFF YES or NO”.

Reference symbols:

“ENTER” button

This is a button on the control panel.

“Display” key

HOW TO USE JOYSTICK AND

“ENTER” BUTTON

This is a select key on the screen. By

selecting this key you can proceed to the

next function.

Choose an item on the display using the joystick.

Push the “ENTER” button only when the use of

it is instructed on the display.

SAA0796

HOW TO USE “TRIP” BUTTON

NAMES OF THE COMPONENTS

When the “TRIP” button is pushed, the following

modes will display on the screen.

HOW TO USE “PREV” BUTTON

1. “TRIP” drive computer button; refer to page

4-3.

Finish setup:

TRIP 1 (TIME, DIST, AVG) → TRIP 2 (TIME,

DIST, AVG) → OFF

If you touch “PREV” button after the setup is

completed, the setup will start over.

2. “FUEL ECON” button; refer to page 4-4.

3. Clock adjust button; refer to page 4-4.

4. “TRIP RESET” button; refer to page 4-3.

5. “E/M” button; refer to page 4-4.

You can set the two kinds of journey time (TIME

— max 99 hours 59 minutes), trip odometer

(DIST — mile or km) and average speed (AVG —

MPH or km/h).

To reset the TRIP 1 or TRIP 2, push the “TRIP”

button or the “TRIP RESET” button for more

than approximately 1.5 seconds.

6. “MAINT” maintenance button; refer to page

4-5.

7. “SETTING” button; refer to page 4-5.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The display is updated every 30 seconds. At

about the first 30 seconds and 1/3 miles (500

m) after a reset or connecting battery cable, the

display will show (----).

clock will not indicate the correct time.

Readjust the time.

Adjusting the time

To adjust the time, push the “H” or “M” button for

more than approximately 1.5 seconds. The time

indicator will flash.

Distance to empty (DTE — mile or

km)

The distance to empty (DTE) mode provides you

with an estimation of the distance that can be

driven before refueling. The DTE is constantly

being calculated, based on the amount of fuel in

the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption.

Touch the H button to adjust the hour.

Touch the M button to adjust the minute.

To finish the adjusting, press the “PREV” button

or the screen will return to normal after 10

seconds.

The display is updated every 30 seconds.

SAA0797

HOW TO USE “E/M” BUTTON

When the fuel level drops even lower, the DTE

display will change to (*).

HOW TO USE “FUEL ECON”

BUTTON

You can change the unit as follows using the

“E/M” (English/Metric) button.

NOTE:

Unit: US — Mile, °F, MPG

Metric — km, °C, L/100 km

The average fuel consumption (MPG or L/100

km) and the distance to empty (DTE — MI or km)

will appear on the screen when the “FUEL

ECON” button is pushed.

The DTE reading may not change from

the previous reading if the amount of

fuel added is small.

Fuel moving in the tank while driving

may cause the reading to momentarily

change.

Average fuel consumption

(Mpg or L/100 km)

CLOCK

The average fuel consumption mode shows the

average fuel consumption since the last reset.

Resetting is done by pressing the “TRIP RESET”

or “FUEL ECON” button for more than approxi-

mately 1.5 seconds.

The digital clock displays time when the ignition

key is in ACC or ON.

If the power supply is disconnected, the

4-4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CHECK ALL TIRE) is displayed on the screen:

FLAT TIRE — very low tire air pressure.

WARNING

When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced, the pressure of that tire will

not be indicated and not be monitored

by the low tire pressure warning system.

Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/or

system resetting.

SAA0646

SAA0798

HOW TO USE “SETTING” BUTTON

HOW TO USE “MAINT”

(Maintenance) BUTTON

Tire pressure information (if so

equipped)

Pushing the “SETTING” button will change the

settings menu as follows:

Pushing the “MAINT” button will change the

maintenance menu as follows:

Pressure indication in ** psi on the screen

indicates that the pressure is being measured.

After a few driving trips, the pressure for each

tire will be displayed randomly.

1 DISPLAY ON/OFF

2 LANGUAGE

3 BEEP SET

4 SERVICE ALERT

ENGINE OIL → TIRE ROTATION → TIRE

PRESSURE (if so equipped)

The order of tire pressure figures displayed on

the screen does not correspond with the actual

order of the tire position.

To reset the driving distance, push the “MAINT”

button or “TRIP RESET” button for more than

approximately 1.5 seconds.

PERSONALIZED SETTINGS MENU

Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the

heat caused by the vehicle’s traveling condition

and the temperature.

To set the distance, push the joystick to left or

right.

In case of flat tire, a message (FLAT TIRE or

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Auto re-lock time:

Display ON/OFF

Personalized setting menu

The length of the auto door re-lock time can be

set. Select the “Auto Re-Lock time” key, then

move the joystick to adjust the time.

To turn off the screen, select the OFF key of the

“Display ON/OFF” using the joystick.

You can set the electronic systems as follows

using the joystick.

The screen will change to “CONFIRM DISPLAY

OFF YES or NO”.

Slide back DR seat on exit:

Auto headlights sensitivity:

The driver’s seat automatically moves back and

returns to the original position for exceptional

ease of exit and entry.

If YES key is selected using the joystick, the

screen will turn off after 2 beep sound and

approximately 1 second.

Automatic light illumination can be set as de-

sired.

Remote unlock door logic:

Select the “Sensitivity of Automatic Head-

lights” key, then move the joystick to the left

(lower) or right (higher).

To turn on the screen, push the “SETTING”, trip

control, air conditioner (except rear window de-

froster button) or audio button.

This key can switch the unlock doors of the 1st

unlocking operation as follows:

Auto headlights off delay:

Only the driver side door ←→ All the doors

Language

You can control how long it takes the automatic

turn off timer to extinguish the headlights in the

AUTO position.

Horn chirp with remote*:

The language can be changed to “English” or

“Franc¸ais” using the joystick.

This key changes the horn chirp mode that

occurs when pressing the LOCK button on the

keyfob.

Beep set

Select the “Automatic Headlights Off Delay”

key, then move the joystick to the left or right to

adjust the timer.

If the beep set “OFF” key is selected using the

joystick, the beep sound will not operate. (except

some caution beep sounds)

Lights flash with remote*:

This key changes the hazard indicator flash

mode that occurs when pressing the LOCK or

UNLOCK button on the keyfob.

Speed sensing wiper interval:

This key turns on and off the driving speed

dependent intermittent wiper function.

Service alert

* If you change the horn chirp or the light

flash with the keyfob, the mode may not

be changed on the display. Use the key-

fob to return to the original the mode.

If the service alert “ON” key is selected, the

information will be operated when the engine oil

and the tire rotation reaches the preset driving

distance.

Confirm reset settings:

To display the “Confirm Reset Settings”, select

“YES”.

When this key is selected and turned on using

the “ENTER” button, all settings made by PER-

4-6 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —

WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM

SONALIZED SETTINGS will return to the initial

conditions.

Return all settings to default:

When this key is selected and turned on using

the joystick, all settings made by personalized

setting menu will return to the initial conditions.

“DAY/NIGHT” BUTTON

To change the display brightness, push the

“DAY/NIGHT” button. Pushing the button again

will change the display to DAY or NIGHT dis-

play. Then, adjust the brightness moving the

joystick right or left.

If no operation is done within 10 seconds, or if

the “PREV” button is pushed, the display will

return to the previous display.

SAA0648

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

When you use this system, make sure the engine

is running.

If you touch this button after the setup is com-

pleted, the setup will start over, and the display

will return to the climate control or Audio mode,

and Navigation screen.

NAMES OF THE COMPONENTS

1. “TRIP” drive computer button; refer to page

4-8.

If you use the system with the engine not

running (ignition ONor ACC) for a long

time, it will use up all the battery power,

and the engine will not start.

2. “SETTING” button; refer to page 4-11.

SETTING UP THE START-UP

SCREEN

3. Joystick and “ENTER” push button; refer to

page 4-8.

Reference symbols:

“ENTER” button

When you turn the ignition key to ACC, the

SYSTEM START-UP warning is displayed on

the screen. Read the warning and select the

“I AGREE” (English) or “ENTER” (Franc¸ais) key

then push the “ENTER” button.

4. “PREV” previous button; refer to page 4-8.

This is a button on the control panel.

“Display” key

5. “DAY/NIGHT” brightness control button; re-

fer to page 4-15.

6 - 10. For Navigation system control buttons;

refer to the separate Navigation Own-

er’s Manual.

This is a select key on the screen. By

selecting this key you can proceed to the

next function.

If you do not push the “ENTER” button, this

system will not proceed to the next step display.

If you do not touch the button or screen key for

more than 1 minute on the TRIP, SETTING or

START-UP screen, the screen will change to

TRIP screen automatically.

HOW TO USE JOYSTICK AND

“ENTER” BUTTON

Choose an item on the display using the joystick

and push the “ENTER” button for operation.

To proceed to the next step, refer to the separate

Navigation system Owner’s Manual.

HOW TO USE “PREV” BUTTON

HOW TO USE THE “TRIP” BUTTON

This has two functions.

When the “TRIP” button is pushed, the following

models will display on the screen.

Go back to the previous display (cancel).

If you touch “PREV” button during setup, the

setup will be canceled and/or the display will

return to the previous screen.

Warning message (if there are any) → TRIP 1

(Elapsed Time, Driving Distance, Average

Speed) → TRIP 2 → FUEL ECONOMY (Aver-

age Fuel Economy, Distance to Empty) →

Finish setup.

4-8 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SAA0654

SAA0695

SAA0655

MAINTENANCE (Engine Oil, Tire Rotation and

Tire Pressure — if so equipped).

Maintenance items

You can set the engine oil and the tire rotation

interval.

Trip 1, trip 2 and fuel economy items

To reset the TRIP 1, TRIP

and FUEL

And the tire pressure will appear on the screen

(if the tire pressure system is equipped).

ECONOMY, select the “RESET” key using the

joystick and push the “ENTER” button or push

the “TRIP” button for more than approximately

1.5 seconds.

To display the setting of the maintenance inter-

val, select the “Engine Oil” or “Tire Rotation” key

using the joystick and push the “ENTER” button.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

In case of flat tire, a message is displayed on the

screen:

FLAT TIRE — very low tire air pressure.

WARNING

When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel

is replaced, the pressure of that tire will

not be indicated and not be monitored

by the low tire pressure warning system.

Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as

possible for tire replacement and/or

system resetting.

SAA0656

SAA0657

To set the maintenance interval, select the

“Maintenance Schedule” key by using the joy-

stick and push the joystick to right or left.

Tire pressure information (if so

equipped)

Pressure indication in ** psi on the screen

indicates that the pressure is being measured.

After a few driving trips, the pressure for each

tire will be displayed randomly.

To reset the maintenance interval, select the

“RESET” key using the joystick and push the

“ENTER” button.

To display the MAINTENANCE INFORMATION,

automatically when setting trip distance is

reached, select the “Display Maintenance Noti-

fication” key and push the “ENTER” button.

The order of tire pressure figures displayed on

the screen does not correspond with the actual

order of the tire position.

Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the

heat caused by the vehicle’s traveling condition

and the temperature.

4-10 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Display Off:

To turn off the screen, push the “SETTING”

button and select the “Display” key and “Display

Off” key. The indicator of the “Display Off” will

turn on in amber. When any mode button is

pushed with the screen off, the screen turns on

for further operation. The screen will turn off

automatically 5 seconds after the operation is

finished on the map display in the Audio, HVAC

(Heater and air conditioner).

To turn on the screen, push the “SETTING”

button and select the “Display” key and “Display

Off” key, then set the screen to on by pushing

the “ENTER” button.

SAA0649A

SAA0652

Setting Audio or HVAC display:

For models with navigation system:

“Display” settings

Choose the “Audio” or “HVAC” (Heater and

air conditioner) key to be displayed at the

bottom, by using the joystick. The audio or

HVAC (heater, air conditioner) setting condition

will normally appear on the screen.

* — Please refer to the separate Navigation

system Owner’s Manual.

The DISPLAY SETTINGS screen will appear

when pushing the “SETTING” button, selecting

“Display” key and pushing the “ENTER” button.

HOW TO USE THE “SETTING”

BUTTON

Brightness/Contrast/Map Background:

To return to the setting screen, push the

“SETTING” button or “PREV” button.

The SETTING screen will appear when the

“SETTING” button is pushed.

To adjust the brightness and contrast of the

screen, select the “Brightness/contrast” key and

push the “ENTER” button. Then you can adjust

the brightness to Darker or Brighter, the contrast

to Lower or Higher using the joystick.

The Map Background is for models with naviga-

tion system. Please refer to the separate naviga-

tion system Owner’s Manual.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SAA0793

SAA0794

SAA0505A

Indicator light is not illuminated. — OFF

Keyless remote response — Horn*:

Vehicle electronic systems

Adjust driver seat when exiting vehicle

(if so equipped):

This key changes the horn chirp mode that

occurs when pressing the LOCK button on the

keyfob.

The VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS screen

will appear when selecting the “Vehicle Elec-

tronic Systems” key with the joystick and

pushing the “ENTER” button.

The driver’s seat automatically moves back and

returns to the original position for exceptional

ease of exit and entry.

Keyless remote response — Lights*:

You can set the various electronic systems

operating conditions.

This key changes the hazard indicator flash

mode that occurs when pressing the LOCK or

UNLOCK button on the keyfob.

Remote unlock driver’s door first:

To set an operating condition, select the appli-

cable item using the joystick, and push the

“ENTER” button.

This key can switch the unlock doors of the 1st

unlocking operation as follows:

* If you change the horn chirp or the light

flash with the keyfob, the mode may not

be changed with the display. Use the

keyfob to return the mode.

ON (Only the driver side door) ←→ OFF (All the

doors)

The indicator light alternately turns on and off

each time the “ENTER” button is pressed.

Indicator light is illuminated. — ON

4-12 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Auto re-lock time:

HICLE ELECTRONICS will return to the initial

conditions.

The length of the auto door re-lock time can be

set. Select the “Auto Re-Lock time” key, then

move the joystick and push the ENTER button to

adjust the time.

Sensitivity of automatic headlights:

Automatic light illumination can be set as de-

sired.

Select the “Sensitivity of Automatic Head-

lights” key, then move the joystick to the left

(lower) or right (higher).

SAA0658

Automatic headlights off delay:

You can control how long it takes the automatic

turn off timer to extinguish the headlights in the

AUTO position.

System settings

Language/Unit:

The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear when

selecting the “Language/Unit” key and pushing

the “ENTER” button.

Select the “Automatic Headlights Off Delay”

key, then move the joystick to the left or right to

adjust the timer.

Language: English or French

Speed dependent wiper:

Unit: US — Mile, °F, MPG

Metric — km, °C, L/100 km

This key turns on and off the driving speed

dependent intermittent wiper function.

You can select the language and unit using the

joystick and “ENTER” button.

Return all settings to default:

When this key is selected and turned on using

the “ENTER” button, all settings made by VE-

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SAA0659

SAA0660

SAA0661

Clock:

Setting daylight saving time

Adjusting the time to the GPS

Adjusting the time

Turn ON or OFF daylight saving time.

Select the “Auto Adjust” key.

Select the “Hours” or “Minutes” key and tilt the

joystick to the right or left to adjust the time.

Every time the “Daylight Saving Time” key is

selected, the light turns ON and OFF alternately.

The time will be reset to the GPS time.

The time will change step by step.

ON: The displayed time advances by one hour.

OFF: The current time is displayed.

After completion of the setting, press the “PRE-

VIOUS” button.

4-14 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

the selected zone will be displayed.

“Pacific” zone has been set as the initial (default)

setting.

Beep setting:

When Beep setting is on (indicator light on), a

beep will sound if any audio button is pushed.

“DAY/NIGHT” BUTTON

To change the display brightness, push the

“DAY/NIGHT” button. Pushing the button again

will change the display to DAY or NIGHT dis-

play. Then, adjust the brightness moving the

joystick right or left.

SAA0662

SAA0663

If no operation is done within 10 seconds, or if

the “PREV” button is pushed, the display will

return to the previous display.

Selecting the time zone

2. Select one of the following zones depending

on the current location.

1. Select the “Select Time Zone” key.

The [TIME ZONE] screen will appear.

“Pacific” zone

“Mountain” zone

“Central” zone

“Eastern” zone

“Atlantic” zone

“Newfoundland” zone

After selection, the [CLOCK SETTINGS] screen

will appear.

The GPS time (manual time) corresponding to

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VENTILATORS

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

(Automatic)

SAA0640

Open or close, and adjust the air flow direction

of ventilators.

k:This symbol indicates that the vents are

closed when the vent switch is moved to the

left.

k:This symbol indicates that the vents are open

when the vent switch is moved to the right.

SAA0641

1. “AUTO” climate control ON button

5. “

” rear window defroster switch; refer

to the “2. Instrument and controls” section.

6. “A/C” air conditioner ON/OFF button

7. “MODE” manual air flow control button

2. “

3. “

4. “

” fresh air button

” air recirculation button

” front defroster button

4-16 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8. Temperature control knob(driver only, or

driver and passenger)

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

WARNING

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating

(AUTO)

9. “OFF” button for climate control system

The air conditioner cooling function

operates only when the engine is

running.

10. Fan speed control knob

This mode may be normally used all year round

as the system automatically works to keep a

constant temperature. Air flow distribution and

fan speed are also controlled automatically.

11. “DUAL” passenger side temperature con-

trol ON/OFF button

Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the support

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should not be left alone either. On

hot, sunny days, temperatures in a

closed vehicle could quickly become

high enough to cause severe or pos-

sibly fatal injuries to people or ani-

mals.

12. Temperature control knob(passenger side)

1. Push the AUTO button on. (AUTO will be

displayed.)

2. Turn the temperature set dial to the left or

right to set the desired temperature.

Adjust the temperature set dial to about 75°F

(24°C) for normal operation.

The temperature of the passenger compart-

ment will be maintained automatically. Air

flow distribution and fan speed are also con-

trolled automatically.

Using the recirculation mode for long

periods may cause the interior air to

become stale and the windows to fog

up.

3. You can individually set driver and front pas-

senger side temperature using each tem-

perature control knob. When the DUAL but-

ton is pushed or passenger side temperature

control knobis turned, the DUAL indicator

will come on. To turn off the passenger side

temperature control, push the DUAL button.

Changing heating or air conditioning

controls should not be done while

driving so that full attention may be

given to vehicle operation.

Start the engine and operate the controls to

activate the air conditioner.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

clean, push the AUTO button to return to the

auto mode.

Heating (A/C OFF)

Fresh air

Push the button

the passenger compartment. The indicator light

on the button will come on.

to draw outside air into

The air conditioner does not activate. When you

need to heat only, use this mode.

When the

front defroster button is

pushed, the air conditioner will automatically

be turned on at outside temperatures above

23°F (−5°C) to defog the windshield, and the

air recirculate mode will automatically be

turned off.

1. Push the A/C button. (A/C OFF will be

displayed and A/C indicator will turn off.)

Automatic intake air control

In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be con-

trolled automatically. To manually control the

intake air, push the air recirculate

2. Turn the temperature set dial to the left or

right to set the desired temperature.

or fresh

Outside air is drawn into the passenger

compartment to improve the defogging per-

formance.

The temperature of the passenger compart-

ment will be maintained automatically. Air

flow distribution and fan speed are also con-

trolled automatically.

air button. To return to the automatic

control mode, push the indicator-illuminated but-

ton for about 2 seconds. The indicator lights

(both air recirculate and fresh air buttons) will

flash twice, and then the intake air will be

controlled automatically.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control

Do not set the temperature lower than the

outside air temperature. Otherwise the sys-

tem may not work properly.

Turn the fan control button

control the fan speed.

to manually

Air flow control

Not recommended if windows fog up.

Pushing the MODE manual air flow control

button selects the air outlet to:

Push the AUTO button to return to automatic

control of the fan speed.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging

Air flows from center and side ventila-

tors.

1. Push the

FRONT defroster button on.

Air recirculation

(The indicator light on the button will come

on.)

Push the air recirculation button

culate interior air inside the vehicle. The indicator

light on the button will come on.

to recir-

Air flows from center and side ventila-

tors and foot outlets.

2. Turn the temperature set dial to the left or

right to set the desired temperature.

Air flows from foot outlets and side

ventilators.

The air recirculation

cannot be activated

To quickly remove ice from the outside of the

windows, turn the fan speed control knobto

right and set to the maximum position.

when the air conditioner is in the front defrosting

mode

Air flows from defroster, foot outlets

and side ventilators.

As soon as possible after the windshield is

4-18 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

decreases significantly or if windows fog

up easily when operating the heater or air

conditioning system.

To turn the system off

Push the OFF button.

OPERATING TIPS

When the engine coolant temperature and out-

side air temperature are low, the air flow from the

foot outlets may not operate for a maximum of

150 seconds. However, this is not a malfunction.

After the coolant temperature warms up, the air

flow from the foot outlets will operate normally.

SAA0642

The sensor on the instrument panel helps main-

tain a constant temperature; do not put anything

on or around this sensor.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

The air conditioning system is equipped with an

in-cabin microfilter which collects dirt, pollen,

dust, etc. To make sure the air conditioner heats,

defogs, and ventilates efficiently, replace the

filter according to the specified maintenance

intervals listed in your Service and Maintenance

Guide. To replace the filter, contact your

NISSAN dealer.

The filter should be replaced if the air flow

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

AUDIO SYSTEM

The air conditioning system in your NISSAN

vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed

with the environment in mind. This refrigerant

will not harm the earth’s ozone layer. How-

ever, special charging equipment and lubricants

are required when servicing your NISSAN air

conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubri-

cants will cause severe damage to your air

conditioning system. See “Capacities and rec-

ommended fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Technical

and consumer information” section for air con-

ditioning system refrigerant and lubricant recom-

mendations.

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON and press

the power on switch to turn on the radio. If you

listen to the radio with the engine not running,

the key should be turned to the ACC position.

change. Buildings, terrain, signal distance and

interference from other vehicles can work

against ideal reception. Described below are

some of the factors that can affect your radio

reception.

Radio reception is affected by station signal

strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-

ings, bridges, mountains and other external in-

fluences. Intermittent changes in reception qual-

ity normally are caused by these external

influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-

hicle may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception

Your NISSAN dealer will be able to service your

environmentally friendly air conditioning system.

Your radio system is equipped with state-of-the-

art electronic circuits to enhance radio recep-

tion. These circuits are designed to extend re-

ception range, and to enhance the quality of that

reception.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains re-

frigerant under high pressure. To avoid

personal injury, any air conditioner ser-

vice should be done only by an experi-

enced technician with proper equip-

ment.

However there are some general characteristics

of FM, AM and satellite radio signals that can

affect radio reception quality in a moving vehicle,

even when the finest equipment is used. These

characteristics are completely normal in a given

reception area, and do not indicate any malfunc-

tion in your radio system.

Remember that a moving vehicle is not the ideal

place to listen to a radio. Because of the move-

ment, reception conditions will constantly

4-20 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade

and/or drift.

power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION

Static and flutter: During signal interference from

buildings, large hills or due to antenna position,

usually in conjunction with increased distance

from the station transmitter, static or flutter can

be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the

treble control counterclockwise to reduce treble

response.

When the satellite radio is first installed or the

battery has been replaced, the satellite radio

may not work properly. This is not a malfunction.

Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite radio

ON for satellite radio to receive all of the neces-

sary data.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NO

SAT” is displayed when the SAT button is

pressed, unless optional satellite receiver and

antenna were factory installed (late availability

Multipath reception: Because of the reflective

characteristics of FM signals, direct and re-

flected signals reach the receiver at the same

time. The signals may cancel each other, result-

ing in momentary flutter or loss of sound.

only/retrofit unavailable), and an XM

SAA0306

SIRIUS^TMsatellite radio service subscription is

active.

AM RADIO RECEPTION

FM RADIO RECEPTION

AM signals, because of their low frequency, can

bend around objects and skip along the ground.

In addition, the signals can be bounced off the

ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of

these characteristics. AM signals are also sub-

ject to interference as they travel from transmitter

to receiver.

Satellite radio performance may be effected if

cargo carried on the roof rack blocks the satellite

radio signal.

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 to 30

miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural (single

channel) FM having slightly more range than

stereo FM. External influences may sometimes

interfere with FM station reception even if the FM

station is within 25 miles (40 km). The strength

of the FM signal is directly related to the distance

between the transmitter and receiver. FM signals

follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the

same characteristics as light. For example they

will reflect off objects.

If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite

radio antenna.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Cassette player

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing

through freeway underpasses or in areas with

many tall buildings. It can also occur for several

seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in

areas where no obstacles exist.

To maintain good quality sound,

NISSAN recommends using cassette

tapes of 60 minutes or shorter in length.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical

Cassette tapes should be removed from

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

the player when not in use. Store cas-

settes in their protective cases and

away from direct sunlight, heat, dust,

moisture and magnetic sources.

During cold weather or rainy days, the

player may malfunction due to the hu-

midity. If this occurs, remove the CD and

dehumidify or ventilate the player com-

pletely.

Direct sunlight can cause the cassette to

become deformed. The use of deformed

cassettes may cause the cassette to jam

in the player.

The player may skip while driving on

rough roads.

The CD player sometimes cannot func-

tion when the compartment tempera-

ture is extremely high. Decrease the

temperature before use.

Do not use cassettes with labels which

are peeling and loose. If used, the label

could jam in the player.

If a cassette has loose tape, insert a

pencil through one of the cassette hubs

and rewind the tape firmly around the

hubs. Loose tape may cause tape jam-

ming and wavering sound quality.

Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.

CDs that are of poor quality, dirty,

scratched, covered with fingerprints, or

that have pin holes may not work prop-

erly.

Over a period of time, the playback

head, capstan and pinch roller may col-

lect a tape coating residue as the tape is

played. This residue accumulation can

cause weak or wavering sound, and

should be removed periodically with a

head cleaning tape. If the residue is not

removed periodically, the player may

need to be disassembled for cleaning.

The following CDs may not work prop-

erly:

•

Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

SAA0480

Compact Disc (CD) player

Do not use the following CDs as they

may cause the CD player to malfunction.

Only use high quality 4.7 inches (12 cm)

round discs that have the “COMPACT

disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc or

packaging.

•

3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

CDs that are not round

4-22 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

•

CDs with a paper label

CDs that are warped, scratched, or

have abnormal edges

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. SEEK/APS REW, APS FF/TRACK

CHANGE button

2. CD slot

3. Station and preset (FM/AM/SAT)/CD

insert/eject or CD play (Type B only) select

button

4. A.B.C. preset select button

5. CD EJECT button

6. RADIO TUNE/FF⋅REW button

7. ON⋅OFF/VOLUME control knob

8. “PAUSE/MUTE” button

SAA0650

9. “FM” band select button (Type A)

10. “AM” band select button (Type A)

11. CD play button

12. “SAT” satellite radio select button

13. Tuning up/down knoband AUDIO (BASS,

TREBLE, FADE, and BALANCE, (SSV and

NR (Dolby) — Type B only)) knob

14. PROG (program)/RPT (repeat) play button

15. FM-AM band select button (Type B)

16. TAPE play button (Type B)

17. TAPE EJECT button (Type B)

SAA0651

18. CD LOAD button (Type B only)

4-24 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

system is on, pushing the ON⋅OFF/Volume con-

HIGH, turn the Tuning knobto right or left. (type

B only).

FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH

CASSETTE PLAYER AND

COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER

(TYPE A)/CD CHANGER (TYPE B)

trol knobturns the system off.

To change the NR (Dolby) mode to OFF or ON,

turn the Tuning knobto right or left while cas-

sette tape is playing. When Dolby is ON, the

To turn the radio off, press the Power/Volume

control knob.

Turn the ON⋅OFF/Volume control knobto adjust

the volume.

display indicates the

mark.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NO

SAT” is displayed when the SAT button is

pressed, unless optional satellite receiver and

antenna were factory installed (late availability

Dolby noise reduction manufactured under li-

cense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Cor-

poration. Dolby NR and the double-D symbol

This vehicle has Speed Sensitive control Vol-

ume (SSV) for audio (type B only). The audio

volume changes as the driving speed changes.

only/retrofit unavailable), and an XM

“

” are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories

SIRIUS^TMsatellite radio service subscription is

active.

Licensing Corporation.

AUDIO knob (BASS, TREBLE, FADE,

BALANCE, (SSV and NR (Dolby) — type B

only)):

After 10 seconds, the radio, cassette tape or CD

display reappears. Once the sound quality is set

to the desired level, press the AUDIO button

repeatedly until the radio, cassette tape or CD

display appears.

Audio main operation

Press the AUDIO knobto change the selecting

mode as follows.

The tape deck employs a permalloy head which

allows for improved reproduction of high fre-

quency ranges. Noise is also greatly reduced by

the combined use of the Dolby NR (Noise

Reduction) system. The auto loudness circuit

enhances the low frequency range automatically

in both radio reception and tape and CD play-

back.

BASS → TREBLE → FADE → BALANCE →

SSV (type B only) → NR (when cassette playing

type B only)

Display CD text:

To indicate the CD mode text, push the AUDIO

knobduring CD playing.

To adjust BASS, Treble, Fader and Balance,

press the AUDIO knobuntil the desired mode

BASS, TREBLE, FADE or BALANCE appears in

the display. Turn the Tuning knobto adjust Bass

and Treble to the desired level. Use the Tuning

knobalso to adjust Fader or Balance modes.

Fader adjusts the sound level between the front

and rear speakers and Balance adjusts the

sound between the right and left speakers.

Track No. → Track title → Disc title → BASS →

TREBLE → FADE → BALANCE → SSV →

Display mode

ON⋅OFF/Volume control:

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then

push the ON⋅OFF/Volume control knobwhile

the system is off to call up the mode (radio, tape

or CD) which was playing immediately before

the system was turned off. When no CD or tape

is loaded, the radio will come on. While the

To change the indicated text in display mode,

turn the tuning knobwithin 2 seconds.

To change the SSV mode to OFF, LOW, MID or

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The text will change as follows:

AM ↔ FM or SAT (Satellite)

TUNE (Tuning):

When FM/AM/SAT radio select button is

pushed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or

ON, the radio will come on at the station last

played.

WARNING

Display satellite radio text:

The radio should not be tuned while

driving so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation.

The last station played will also come on when

the power knobis turned to ON.

To indicate the satellite mode text, push the

AUDIO knobduring satellite radio play.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NO

SAT” is displayed when the SAT button is

pressed, unless optional satellite receiver and

antenna were factory installed (late availability

Artist → Title → BASS → TREBLE → FADE →

BALANCE → SSV → Display mode

To tune the radio, push the RADIO TUNE button

(

) or turn the Tuning knobto right

To change the indicated text in display mode,

turn the tuning knobwithin 2 seconds.

or left.

only/retrofit unavailable), and an XM

SIRIUS^TMsatellite radio service subscription is

active.

Use these buttons for manual tuning. To move

quickly through the channels, hold either of the

RADIO TUNE buttons down for more than 1.5

seconds.

If a compact disc or tape is playing when the

FM/AM/SAT radio select button is turned to ON,

the compact disc or tape will automatically be

turned off and the last radio station played will

come on.

Pause/mute button:

SEEK/SCANtuning:

To mute or pause the audio sound, push the

PAUSE/MUTE button.

Push the SEEK button

for less

than 1.5 seconds, to tune from high to low or low

to high frequencies and stops at the next broad-

casting station.

The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FM

stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast

signal is weak, the radio will automatically

change from stereo to monaural reception.

To release the mute or pause, push the button

again.

FM-AM-SAT radio operation

Push the

SEEK button for more

than 1.5 seconds to tune from low to high

frequencies and stops at each broadcasting

station for 5 seconds. Pushing the button again

during this 5 seconds period will stop SCAN

tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that

station.

or SAT FM/AM/SAT radio

select:

Pushing the FM/AM (Type B), FM, AM (Type A)

or SAT band select button will change the band

as follows:

4-26 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

If the SEEK button is not pushed within 5

seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next sta-

tion.

tions are in large cities, but many stations are

now considering broadcasting RDS data.

PTY name selection can also be achieved by

pressing the preset buttons.

RDS can display:

Initial PTY names are stored in the preset but-

tons; but these can be changed by pressing the

preset buttons for less than 1.5 seconds when

the desired PTY name is in the display.

Station memory operations:

Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.

Station name, such as “The Groove”.

Eighteen (18) stations can be set for the FM, AM

and SAT band to the A, B and C preset button.

Music or programming type such as “Classi-

cal”, “Country”, or “Rock”.

1. Choose preset channel A, B or C using the

preset select button.

Traffic reports about delays or construction.

2. Tune to the desired station using the SEEK,

SCAN or TUNE button and keep pushing any

of the desired station memory buttons (1 to

6) until a beep sound is heard. (The radio

mutes when the select button is pushed.)

If the station broadcasts RDS information, the

RDS icon is displayed.

Program type (PTY) (Category

(CAT)):

3. The channel indicator will then come on and

the sound will resume. Memorizing is now

complete.

When PROG/RPT button is pressed for more

than 1.5 seconds during FM (SAT) mode, the

PTY (CAT) name of the current tuned station is

displayed. During this time if the PTY (CAT) data

code is zero, or the data is unreadable; the

display will show NONE.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse

blows, the radio memory will be erased. In that

case, reset the desired stations.

1. PTY (CAT) selection mode

Radio data system (RDS):

PTY (CAT) name selection can be done by

the up/down TUNE button

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a

data information service transmitted by some

radio stations on the FM band (not AM band)

and/or SATELLITE band encoded within a regu-

lar radio broadcast. Currently, most RDS sta-

the PTY (CAT) selection mode.

2. PTY SEEK tuning

It is possible to shift the PTY (CAT) name by one

step, with one push of the up/down tuning

After selecting a PTY name, push the SEEK

button

for less than 0.5 sec-

button

onds within 10 seconds. Tuning to the PTY

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

station will start. If you do not push the SEEK

button within the 10 second period, the PTY

mode will be canceled.

ON⋅OFF/VOL control knobwith the cassette

tape still in the player, the tape will resume

playing when the system is turned back on.

less than 1.5 seconds while the tape is being

played, the next program will start to play from

the beginning. Push the

(APS FF) button

several times to skip through programs. The tape

will advance the number of times the button is

pushed (up to nine programs).

Push the SEEK button for more than 1.5

seconds to tune the PTY name station, and

stop at each broadcasting station for 5 sec-

onds. Pushing the button again during this 5

second period will stop SCAN tuning and the

radio will remain tuned to that station. If the

SEEK button is not pushed within 5 seconds,

SCAN tuning moves to the next station.

PLAY:

When the TAPE button is pushed with the

system turned off and a tape loaded, the

system will come on and the tape will play.

When the

(APS REW) button is pushed

for less than 1.5 seconds once, the program

being played starts over from the beginning.

When the TAPE button is pushed with either

the radio or compact disc turned on and the

tape loaded, the compact disc or the radio

will automatically be turned off and the tape

will play.

Push the

(APS REW) button several times

to skip back several selections. The tape will go

back the number of times the button is pushed.

Either the FF or REW symbol flashes on the

display window while searching for the selec-

tion.

Cassette tape player operation

(Type B)

When the TAPE button is pushed with the

TAPE playing, the tape will play the program

recorded on the reverse side.

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and then

lightly insert the cassette tape into the tape door.

The cassette tape will be automatically pulled

into the player.

When pushing the

(APS FF) or

FF (Fast Forward), REW

(Rewind):

(APS REW) button for more than 1.5

seconds, each program will play for about 10

The radio or CD will turn off (if it is on) and the

cassette tape will begin to play.

seconds. To stop playing, push the

again.

button

Push the

(fast forward) button to fast

forward the tape. To rewind the tape, push the

(rewind) button. Either the FF or REW

symbol illuminates on the display window. To

stop the FF or REW function, press the

(fast forward) or

the TAPE button.

This system searches for the blank intervals

between selections. If there is a blank interval

within one program or there is no interval be-

tween programs, the system may not stop in the

desired or expected location.

CAUTION

(rewind) again, or

Do not force the cassette tape into the

tape door. This could cause player dam-

age.

APS (Automatic Program

Search) FF, APS REW:

REPEAT (RPT):

When the PROG/RPT play button is pushed

while the tape is played, the tape program play is

If the system is turned off by pushing the

When the

(APS FF) button is pushed for

4-28 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

repeated. To stop the repeat play, push the

PROG/RPT play button again.

released, the compact disc will return to normal

play speed.

CAUTION

APS (Automatic Program

Search) FF, APS REW:

Metal or chrome tape usage:

Do not force compact discs into the slot.

This could damage the player.

The cassette player will be automatically set to

high performance play when playing a metal or

chrome cassette tape.

When the

(APS FF) button is pushed for

less than 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is

being played, the program next to the present

one will start to play from its beginning. Push

several times to skip through programs. The

compact disc will advance the number of times

the button is pushed. (When the last program on

the compact disc is skipped through, the first

TAPE EJECT:

If the system has been turned off while the

compact disc was playing, pushing the

ON⋅OFF/VOL control knobwill start the com-

pact disc.

When this button is pushed with the tape

loaded, the tape will be ejected.

When the tape is ejected while it is being played,

the system will be turned off.

8 cm diameter compact discs can also be used

without an adapter.

program will be played.) When the

(APS

Compact disc (CD) player operation

(Type A)

REW) button is pushed for less than 1.5 sec-

onds, the program being played returns to its

beginning. Push several times to skip back

through programs. The compact disc will go

back the number of times the button is pushed.

PLAY:

When the CD button is pushed with the system

off and the compact disc loaded, the system will

turn on and the compact disc will start to play.

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position

and insert the compact disc into the slot with the

label side facing up. The compact disc will be

guided automatically into the slot and start play-

ing.

After loading the disc, the number of tracks on

the disc and the play time will appear on the

display.

When pushing the

(APS FF) or

When the CD button is pushed with the com-

pact disc loaded but the tape or the radio

playing, the tape or radio will automatically be

turned off and the compact disc will start to play.

(APS REW) button for more than 1.5

seconds, each track will play for about 10

seconds. To stop playing, push the

again.

button

FF (Fast Forward), REW

(Rewind):

REPEAT (RPT):

If the radio or tape is already operating, it will

automatically turn off and the compact disc will

play.

When the PROG/RPT play button is pushed

while the compact disc is being played, the play

pattern can be changed as follows:

When the

(fast forward) or

(rewind)

button is pushed while the compact disc is

being played, the compact disc will play while

fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

the disc and the play time will appear on the

display.

off and the compact disc loaded, the system will

turn on and the compact disc will start to play.

If the radio or tape is already operating, it will

automatically turn off and the compact disc will

play.

When the CD button is pushed with the com-

pact disc loaded with the tape or the radio

playing, the tape or radio will automatically be

turned off and the compact disc will start to play.

CD EJECT:

When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the

compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be

ejected.

CAUTION

FF (Fast Forward), REW

(Rewind):

When this button is pushed while the compact

disc is being played, the compact disc will come

out and the system will turn off.

Do not force compact discs into the slot.

This could damage the player.

When the

(fast forward) or

(rewind)

button is pushed while the compact disc is

being played, the compact disc will play while

fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is

released, the compact disc will return to normal

play speed.

If the compact disc comes out and is not

removed, it will be pulled back into the slot

to protect it. (except 8 cm diameter com-

pact discs)

If the system has been turned off while the

compact disc was playing, pushing the

ON⋅OFF/VOL control knobwill start the com-

pact disc.

APS (Automatic Program

Search) FF, APS REW:

CD INindicator:

button:

When the

(APS FF) button is pushed for

CD IN indicator appears on the display when the

CD is loaded with the system on.

To insert a CD in the CD changer, push the

LOAD button for less than 1.5 seconds. Select

the loading slot by pushing the CD insert select

button (1 to 6), then insert the CD.

less than 1.5 seconds while the compact disc is

being played, the program next to the present

one will start to play from its beginning. Push

several times to skip through programs. The

compact disc will advance the number of times

the button is pushed. (When the last program on

the compact disc is skipped through, the first

Compact disc (CD) changer

operation (Type B)

To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, push the

LOAD button for more than 1.5 seconds.

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position

and insert the compact disc into the slot with the

label side facing up. The compact disc will be

guided automatically into the slot and start play-

ing. To insert the disc, first push the LOAD

button.

The inserted slot numbers will illuminate on the

display.

program will be played.) When the

(APS

REW) button is pushed for less than 1.5 sec-

onds, the program being played returns to its

beginning. Push several times to skip back

through programs. The compact disc will go

PLAY:

When the CD button is pushed with the system

After loading the disc, the number of tracks on

4-30 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

back the number of times the button is pushed.

When pushing the (APS FF) or

(APS REW) button for more than 1.5

seconds, each track will play for about 10

disc is being played, the compact disc will come

out and the system will turn off.

If the compact disc comes out and is not

removed, it will be pulled back into the slot

to protect it. (except 8 cm diameter com-

pact discs)

seconds. To stop playing, push the

again.

button

CD INindicator:

CD PLAY button:

CD IN indicator appears on the display when the

CD is loaded with the system on.

To change CD, push the CD play select button

(1 to 6). You can select if the CD is inserted.

REPEAT (RPT):

When the PROG/RPT play button is pushed

while the compact disc is played, the play

pattern can be changed as follows:

SAA0451

CD CARE AND CLEANING

Handle a CD by its edges. Never touch the

surface of the disc. Do not bend the disc.

Always place the discs in the storage case

when they are not being used.

CD EJECT:

When the CD EJECT button is pushed with the

compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be

ejected.

To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the

center to the outer edge using a clean, soft

cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular

motion.

Do not use a conventional record cleaner or

alcohol intended for industrial use.

To eject the selected discs by the EJECT button,

push it for less than 1.5 seconds.

To eject all the discs, push the EJECT button for

more than 1.5 seconds.

A new disc may be rough on its inner and

outer edges. Remove the rough edges using

the side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

When this button is pushed while the compact

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FF REW (tape or CD):

Volume control switches

Push the tuning switch

than 1.5 seconds to rewind or fast forward the

tape or to change the playing disc up or down.

for more

Push the volume control switch to increase or

decrease the volume.

Tuning

To stop the FF or REW function, press the

Memory change (radio):

button for less than 1.5 seconds

again.

Push the tuning switch

for less

than 1.5 seconds to change the radio frequency.

Seek tuning (radio):

Push the tuning switch

for more

than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previous

radio station.

SAA0567

APS (Automatic Program Search) FF,

APS REW (tape and CD):

STEERING SWITCH FOR AUDIO

CONTROL (if so equipped)

Push the tuning switch

for less

1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the

present program or skip to the next program.

Push several times to skip back or skip through

programs.

The audio system can be operated using the

controls on the steering wheel.

POWER on/off switch

This system searches for the blank intervals

between selections. If there is a blank interval

within one program or there is no interval be-

tween programs, the system may not stop in the

desired or expected location.

With the ignition key turned to the ACC or ON

position, push the POWER switch to turn the

audio system on or off.

MODE select switch

Push the mode select switch to change the

mode in the sequence of FM, AM, SAT, CD and

Tape.

4-32 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in

your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following

cautions, otherwise the new equipment may

adversely affect the Engine control system and

other electronic parts.

Removing the antenna

You can remove the antenna if necessary.

Hold the bottom of the antenna and remove by

turning counterclockwise.

WARNING

CAUTION

A cellular telephone should not be

used while driving so full attention

may be given to vehicle operation.

Some jurisdictions prohibit the use

of cellular telephones while driving.

Be sure that antenna is removed be-

fore the vehicle enters an automatic

car wash.

Be sure to fold down the antenna

before the vehicle enters a garage

with a low ceiling.

If you must make a call while your

vehicle is in motion, the hands free

cellular phone operational mode (if

so equipped) is highly recommended.

Exercise extreme caution at all times

so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation.

SAA0532

If a conversation in a moving vehicle

requires you to take notes, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop

your vehicle before doing so.

ANTENNA

Placing the antenna

You can adjust the antenna to three different

positions manually.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CAUTION

Keep the antenna as far as possible

away from the electronic control

modules.

Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in

(20 cm) away from the electronic con-

trol system harness. Do not route the

antenna wire next to any harness.

Adjust the antenna standing-wave

ratio as recommended by the manu-

facturer.

Connect the ground wire from the CB

radio chassis to the body.

For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.

4-34 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving............................. 5-2

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide).................................. 5-2

Three way catalyst ........................................................... 5-3

Low tire pressure warning system (if so

Using all wheel drive (AWD) (if so equipped)............. 5-22

AWD lock switch operations...................................... 5-23

AWD warning light........................................................ 5-24

Parking/parking on hills...................................................... 5-26

Power steering..................................................................... 5-27

Brake system........................................................................ 5-27

Braking precautions...................................................... 5-27

Anti-lock brake system (ABS).................................... 5-28

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system (if so

equipped) .............................................................................. 5-29

Cold weather driving .......................................................... 5-30

Freeing a frozen door lock .......................................... 5-30

Antifreeze......................................................................... 5-30

Battery .............................................................................. 5-30

Draining of coolant water ............................................ 5-30

Tire equipment................................................................ 5-31

Special winter equipment............................................ 5-31

Driving on snow or ice................................................. 5-31

Engine block heater (if so equipped)....................... 5-32

equipped)........................................................................... 5-3

Avoiding collision and rollover ...................................... 5-5

On-pavement and offroad driving precautions

(AWD)................................................................................. 5-5

Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving.............................. 5-5

Driving safety precautions.............................................. 5-6

Ignition switch......................................................................... 5-8

Key positions..................................................................... 5-8

Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System............................. 5-9

Before starting the engine................................................... 5-9

Starting the engine ............................................................. 5-10

Driving the vehicle............................................................... 5-10

CVT (Continuously Variable Transmission)............. 5-10

M-CVT (CVT with Manual shift mode)..................... 5-14

Parking brake........................................................................ 5-18

Cruise control (if so equipped)........................................ 5-19

Precautions on cruise control .................................... 5-19

Cruise control operations............................................ 5-19

Break-in schedule ............................................................... 5-21

Increasing fuel economy.................................................... 5-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING

AND DRIVING

tain colorless and odorless carbon mon-

oxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous.

It can cause unconsciousness or death.

nections must pass to

trailer

WARNING

through the seal on the back door or

the body, follow the manufacturer’s

recommendation to prevent carbon

monoxide entry into the vehicle.

Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the support

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should not be left alone either. They

could accidentally injure themselves

or others through inadvertent opera-

tion of the vehicle. Also, on hot,

sunny days, temperatures in a closed

vehicle could quickly become high

enough to cause severe or possibly

fatal injuries to people or animals.

If you suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering the vehicle, drive with all

windows fully open, and have the

vehicle inspected immediately.

If a special body or other equipment

is added for recreational or other

usage, follow the manufacturer’s rec-

ommendation to prevent carbon

monoxide entry into the vehicle.

(Some recreational vehicle appli-

ances such as stoves, refrigerator,

heaters, etc. may also generate car-

bon monoxide.)

Do not run the engine in closed

spaces such as a garage.

Do not park the vehicle with the en-

gine running for any extended length

of time.

Properly secure all cargo to help pre-

vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the seat-

backs. In a sudden stop or collision,

unsecured cargo could cause per-

sonal injury.

Keep the back door closed while driv-

ing, otherwise exhaust gases could

be drawn into the passenger com-

partment. If you must drive with the

back door open, follow these precau-

tions:

The exhaust system and body should

be inspected by a qualified mechanic

whenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes

are entering into the passenger

compartment.

1. Open all the windows.

EXHAUST GAS (Carbon monoxide)

2. Set the air recirculation switch

OFF and the fan control at 4 (high)

to circulate the air.

c. You notice a change in the sound

of the exhaust system.

WARNING

If electrical wiring or other cable con-

Do not breathe exhaust gases; they con-

5-2 Starting and driving

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

d. You have had an accident involv-

ing damage to the exhaust system,

underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

CAUTION

This vehicle is equipped with the low tire pres-

sure warning system, which displays pressure of

all tires (except the spare tire) on the display

screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is

installed in each wheel.

Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits

from leaded gasoline seriously re-

duce the three way catalyst’s ability

to help reduce exhaust pollutants.

THREE WAY CATALYST

The three way catalyst is an emission control

device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust

gases in the converter are burned at high tem-

peratures to help reduce pollutants.

Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-

tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or

electrical systems can cause overrich

fuel flow into the three way catalyst,

causing it to overheat. Do not keep

driving if the engine misfires, or if

noticeable loss of performance or

other unusual operating conditions

are detected. Have the vehicle in-

The low tire pressure warning system will acti-

vate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds

above 20 MPH (32 km/h). Also, this system may

not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for

example, a flat tire while driving).

WARNING

Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the

heat caused by the vehicle’s operation and the

outside temperature. Low outside temperature

can lower the temperature of the air inside the

tire which can cause a lower tire inflation pres-

sure. This may cause the low tire pressure

warning light to illuminate.

The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-

tem are very hot. Keep people, ani-

mals or flammable materials away

from the exhaust system compo-

nents.

spected promptly by

dealer.

NISSAN

Avoid driving with an extremely low

fuel level. Running out of fuel could

cause the engine to misfire, damag-

ing the three way catalyst.

Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags. They may

ignite and cause a fire.

If the warning light illuminates in low ambient

temperatures as described above, check the tire

pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure

to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown

on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn

the low tire pressure warning light OFF.

Do not race the engine while warm-

ing it up.

Do not push or tow your vehicle to

start the engine.

Frequently check the tire pressure information

display on the display screen and adjust pres-

sure of each tire properly. (The order of the tire

Starting and driving 5-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

pressure figures displayed on the screen does

not correspond with the actual order of the tire

position.) See “Tire pressure information” in the

“4. Display screen, heater, air conditioner and

audio systems” section for tire pressure monitor.

pressure of all four tires. Adjust the

tire pressure to the recommended

COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire

and Loading Information label to turn

the low tire pressure warning light

OFF. If you have a flat tire, replace it

with a spare tire as soon as possible.

(See “Flat tire” in the “6. In case of

emergency” section for changing a

flat tire.)

CAUTION

Do not place metalized film or any metal

parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows.

This may cause poor reception of the

signals from the tire pressure sensors,

and the low tire pressure warning sys-

tem will not function properly.

LOW TIRE PRESSURE warning

If the vehicle is being driven with an extremely

low tire pressure (lower than 27 psi, 190 kPa),

the low tire pressure warning light comes on,

and the chime sounds for about 10 seconds.

FCC Notice:

For additional information regarding the above

warning, see “Warning/indicator lights and au-

dible reminders” in the “2. Instruments and

controls” section.

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the manufacturer compliance

could void the user’s authority to operate

the equipment.

When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel is replaced, the tire pressure of

that tire will not be indicated and the

low tire pressure warning system will

not function. Contact your NISSAN

dealer as soon as possible for tire

replacement and/or system reset-

ting.

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry

Canada.

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light

comes on while driving, avoid sudden

steering maneuvers or abrupt brak-

ing, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the

road to a safe location and stop the

vehicle as soon as possible. Serious

vehicle damage could occur and may

lead to an accident and could result

in serious personal injury. Check the

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) This device may not cause

harmful interference, and (2) this device

must accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause undes-

ired operation of the device.

Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pres-

sure sensors.

5-4 Starting and driving

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

unbelted or improperly belted person is

significantly more likely to be injured or

killed than a person properly wearing a

seat belt.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND

ROLLOVER

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND

DRIVING

WARNING

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFFROAD

DRIVING PRECAUTIONS (AWD)

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe

and prudent manner may result in loss

of control or an accident.

Never drive under the influence of alco-

hol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream

reduces coordination, delays reaction

time and impairs judgment. Driving after

drinking alcohol increases the likeli-

hood of being involved in an accident

injuring yourself and others. Addition-

ally, if you are injured in the accident,

alcohol can increase the severity of the

injury.

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher

rollover rate than other types of vehicles.

They have higher ground clearance than passen-

ger cars to make them capable of performing in

a variety of on-pavement and offroad applica-

tions. This gives them a higher center of gravity

than ordinary cars. An advantage of higher

ground clearance is a better view of the road,

allowing you to anticipate problems. However,

they are not designed for cornering at the same

speeds as conventional two-wheel drive ve-

hicles any more than low-slung sports cars are

designed to perform satisfactorily under offroad

conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or

abrupt maneuvers, particularly at high speeds.

As with other vehicles of this type, failure to

operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss

of control or vehicle rollover.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey

all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,

high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-

neuvers, because these driving practices could

cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As

with any vehicle, a loss of control could

result in a collision with other vehicles or

objects, or cause the vehicle to rollover,

particularly if the loss of control causes the

vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all

times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive

when under the influence of alcohol or drugs

(including prescription or over-the-counter

drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always

wear your seat belt. See “Seat belts” in the “1.

Seats, restraints and supplemental air bag sys-

tems” section. Also instruct your passengers to

do so.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. You must

not drive under the influence of alcohol. Every

year thousands of people are injured or killed in

alcohol related accidents. Although the local

laws vary on what is considered to be legally

intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all

people differently and most people underesti-

mate the effects of alcohol.

Be sure to read the driving safety precautions

later in this section.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix!

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in

collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an

And that’s true for drugs too (over the counter,

prescription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if

Starting and driving 5-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by

alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

Many hills are too steep for any ve-

hicle. If you drive up them, you may

stall. If you drive down them, you may

not be able to control your speed. If

you drive across them, you may roll

over.

Heavy braking going down

hill

could cause your brakes to overheat

and fade, resulting in loss of control

and an accident. Apply brakes lightly

and use a low range to control your

speed.

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Please observe the following precautions:

WARNING

Do not shift selector lever while driv-

ing on downhill grades as this could

cause loss of control of the vehicle.

Unsecured cargo can be thrown

around when driving over rough ter-

rain. Properly secure all cargo so it

will not be thrown forward and cause

injury to you or your passengers.

Drive carefully when off the road and

avoid dangerous areas. Every person

who drives or rides in this vehicle

should be seated with their seat belt

fastened. This will keep you and your

passengers in position when driving

over rough terrain.

Be sure to use the engine brake. The

foot brake performance may be re-

duced, resulting in a possible acci-

dent.

To avoid raising the center of gravity

excessively, do not exceed the rated

capacity of the roof rack (if so

equipped) and evenly distribute the

load. Secure heavy loads in the cargo

area as far forward and as low as

possible. Do not equip the vehicle

with tires larger than specified in this

manual. This could cause your ve-

hicle to roll over.

Stay alert when driving to the top of a

hill. At the top there could be a drop-

off or other hazard that could cause

an accident.

Before driving up or down grades,

check the road surface for bumps or

potholes. Be sure to climb a gentle

slope and descend a gentle slope.

If your engine stalls or you cannot

make it to the top of a steep hill,

never attempt to turn around. Your

vehicle could tip or roll over. Always

back straight down in R (Reverse)

range. Never back down in N (Neu-

tral), using only the brake, as this

could cause loss of control.

Do not drive across steep slopes.

Instead drive either straight up or

straight down the slopes. Off-road

vehicles can tip over sideways much

more easily than they can forward or

backward.

Do not grip the inside or spokes of

the steering wheel when driving off-

road. The steering wheel could move

suddenly and injure your hands. In-

5-6 Starting and driving

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

stead drive with your fingers and

thumbs on the outside of the rim.

at the same speeds as conventional

two wheel drive vehicles. Failure to

operate this vehicle correctly could

result in loss of control and/or a roll

over accident.

Do not drive continuously on sandy

or muddy roads with the front wheels

spinning. The AWD warning light

blinks and the driving mode changes

to 2WD. This could reduce traction

force remarkably. Be especially care-

ful when towing a trailer. (AWD mod-

els)

Before operating the vehicle, ensure

that the driver and all passengers

have their seat belts fastened.

Always use tires of the same type,

size, brand, construction (bias, bias-

belted or radial), and tread pattern on

all four wheels. Install tire chains on

the front wheels when driving on slip-

pery roads and drive carefully.

Always drive with the floor mats in

place as the floor may become hot.

Lower your speed when encountering

Do not use 2-wheel chassis dyna-

mometers or 2-wheel free rollers.

(AWD models)

strong crosswinds. With

higher

center of gravity, your NISSAN is

more affected by strong side winds.

Slower speeds ensure better vehicle

control.

Be sure to check the brakes immedi-

ately after driving in mud or water.

See “Brake system” later in this sec-

tion for wet brakes.

Never operate the accelerator pedal

with the front wheels raised and the

rear wheels on the ground while jack-

ing up or with the front wheels on the

roller and the rear wheels on the

ground. Otherwise, the vehicle could

jump. (AWD models)

Do not drive beyond the performance

of the tires, even with AWD engaged.

Avoid parking your vehicle on steep

hills. If you get out of the vehicle and

it rolls forward, backward or side-

ways, you could be injured.

Accelerating quickly, sharp steering

maneuvers or sudden braking may

cause loss of control.

When a wheel is suspended due to

running off the road, do not idle the

wheel excessively. (AWD models)

If at all possible, avoid sharp turning

maneuvers, particularly at high

speeds. Your NISSAN all wheel drive

vehicle has a higher center of gravity

than a two wheel drive vehicle. The

vehicle is not designed for cornering

Whenever you drive off-road through

sand, mud or water as deep as the

wheel hub, more frequent mainte-

nance may be required. See “Peri-

odic maintenance” in the “Service

and Maintenance Guide”.

When the vehicle is on a free roller or

the front or rear wheels are jacked

up, do not start the engine. (AWD

models)

Starting and driving 5-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IGNITION SWITCH

1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park)

position.

WARNING

2. Turn the ignition key slightly in the ON direc-

tion.

Never remove or turn the key to the

LOCK position while driving. The steer-

ing wheel will lock. This may cause the

driver to lose control of the vehicle and

could result in serious vehicle damage

and/or personal injury.

3. Turn the key toward the LOCK position.

4. Remove the key.

If the key is removed from the ignition switch, the

selector lever cannot be moved from P (Park)

position. The selector lever can be moved if

the ignition switch is in the ONposition

and the foot brake pedal is depressed.

KEY POSITIONS

There is an OFF position in between LOCK and

ACC, although it does not show on the lock

cylinder. When the ignition is in OFF the steering

wheel is not locked.

The switch includes an anti-theft steering lock

device.

SSD0083F

On CVT (Continuously Variable Transmission)

models, the ignition lock is designed so that the

key cannot be turned to LOCK and removed

until the selector lever is moved to the P (Park)

position.

LOCK (Normal parking position) (0)

The ignition key can only be removed when the

switch is in this position.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, it

must be turned about 1/6 of a turn clockwise

from the straight up position.

OFF (1)

When removing the key from the ignition, make

sure the selector lever is in the P (Park) position.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the key to

the LOCK position. Remove the key. To

unlock the steering wheel, insert the key

and turn it gently while rotating the steer-

ing wheel slightly right and left.

The engine can be turned off without locking the

steering wheel.

If the selector lever is not returned to P (Park)

position, the key cannot be moved toward

LOCK.

ACC (Accessories) (2)

This position activates electrical accessories

such as the radio when the engine is not running.

When the key cannot be turned toward the

LOCK position, proceed as follows to remove

the key:

ON (Normal operating position) (3)

5-8 Starting and driving

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

This position turns on the ignition system and the

electrical accessories.

Immobilizer System key.

Make sure the area around the vehicle is

clear.

If this procedure allows the engine to start,

NISSAN recommends placing the registered

Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key on a

separate key ring to avoid interference from

other devices.

Maintenance items should be checked peri-

odically, for example, each time you check

engine oil.

START (4)

This position activates the starter motor, starting

the engine.

Check that all windows and lights are clean.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

Visually inspect tires for their appearance and

condition. Also, check tires for proper infla-

tion.

The Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System will not

allow the engine to start without the use of the

registered Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System

key.

Lock all doors.

Position seat and adjust head restraints.

Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

Adjust the pedal position.

If the engine fails to start using the registered

Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System key, it may be

due to interference caused by another Nissan

Vehicle Immobilizer System key, an automated

toll road device or automated payment device on

the key ring. Restart the engine using the follow-

ing procedures:

Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to

do likewise.

Check the operation of warning lights when

key is turned to the ON (3) position.

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position

for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK

position and wait approximately 10 seconds.

3. Repeat step 1 and 2 again.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device

(which may have caused the interference)

separate from the registered Nissan Vehicle

Starting and driving 5-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STARTING THE ENGINE

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

1. Apply the parking brake.

CVT (Continuously Variable

Transmission)

CAUTION

2. Move the selector lever to P (Park) or N

(Neutral). (P preferred.)

Gate type shift

Do not operate the starter for more than

15 seconds at a time. If the engine does

not start, turn the key off and wait 10

seconds before cranking again, other-

wise the starter could be damaged.

The starter is designed not to operate if the

selector lever is in one of the driving posi-

tions.

The CVT in your vehicle is electronically con-

trolled by a transmission control module to pro-

duce maximum power and smooth operation.

3. Crank the engine with your foot off the

accelerator pedal by turning the ignition

key to START. Release the key when the

engine starts. If the engine starts, but fails to

run, repeat the above procedure.

Shown on the following pages are the recom-

mended operating procedures for this transmis-

sion. Follow these procedures for maximum ve-

hicle performance and driving enjoyment.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30

seconds after starting. Do not race the en-

gine while warming it up. Drive at moderate

speed for a short distance first, especially in

cold weather.

Starting the vehicle

If the engine is very hard to start in extremely

cold weather or when restarting, depress the

accelerator pedal a little (approximately 1/3

to the floor) and hold it then crank the engine.

Release the key and the accelerator pedal

when the engine starts.

After starting the engine, fully depress the foot

brake pedal before shifting the selector lever to

the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D (Drive), S (Sec-

ond) or L (Low) position. Be sure the vehicle is

fully stopped before attempting to shift the se-

lector lever.

In cold weather, keep the engine running for

a minimum of 2 - 3 minutes before shutting it

off. Starting and stopping the engine over a

short period of time may make the vehicle

more difficult to start.

If the engine is very hard to start because it is

flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the

way to the floor and hold it. Crank the engine

for 5 to 6 seconds. After cranking the engine,

release the accelerator pedal. Crank the en-

gine with your foot off the accelerator

pedal by turning the ignition key to START.

Release the key when the engine starts. If the

engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the

above procedure.

This CVT model is designed so that the

foot brake pedal must be depressed be-

fore shifting from P (Park) to any drive

position while the ignition switch is ON.

The selector lever cannot be moved out of

P (Park) position and into any of the other

shift range if the ignition key is turned to

the LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if the

key is removed from the switch.

5-10 Starting and driving

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and

shift into a driving range.

CAUTION

2. Release the parking brake and foot brake,

then gradually start the vehicle in motion.

When stopping the vehicle on an uphill

grade, do not hold the vehicle by de-

pressing the accelerator pedal. The foot

brakes should be used for this purpose.

WARNING

Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P or Nto R, or D.

Always depress the brake pedal until

shifting is completed. Failure to do

so could cause you to lose control

and have an accident.

SSD0288

Cold engine idle speed is high, so use

caution when shifting into a forward

or reverse range before the engine

has warmed up.

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress the brake

pedal and shift the selector lever from P (Park) to

R (Reverse), D (Drive), or any of the desired shift

positions.

On slippery roads, do not downshift.

This may cause a loss of control.

Never shift to P or R while the vehicle

is moving. This could cause you to

lose control and have an accident.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the selector

lever is in any position while the engine

is not running. Failure to do so could

cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly

Starting and driving 5-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

parked or when starting the engine. Make sure

the vehicle is completely stopped. The brake

pedal must be depressed to move the se-

lector lever from N(Neutral) or any drive

position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake

first, then move the lever to the P (Park) position.

while the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive):

or roll away and result in serious per-

sonal injury and/or property damage.

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

S (Second):

If the key is turned to OFF or ACC for any reason

while the vehicle is in R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or

any D (Drive) position, the key cannot be turned

to LOCK and be removed from the ignition

switch. Additionally, the selector lever cannot be

moved to R (Reverse) from N (Neutral) or any D

(Drive) position. The selector lever can be moved

to R (Reverse) from any of the D (Drive) posi-

tions within 3 minutes after the ignition switch is

turned to the ACC or OFF position. The selector

lever can be moved from R (Reverse) to P (Park)

with the key in the OFF or ACC position.

If the key cannot be turned to LOCK, perform the

following steps:

Use this position for the improved engine brak-

ing.

L (Low):

CAUTION

Use this position for maximum engine braking on

steep downhill gradients/climbing steep slopes

and whenever approaching sharp bends. Do not

use the L position in any other circumstances.

Use this position only when the vehicle

is completely stopped.

Shift from the D to S or L position after releasing

the accelerator pedal.

R (Reverse):

Use this position to back up. Always be sure the

vehicle is completely stopped when selecting R

(Reverse). The brake pedal must be de-

pressed to move the selector lever from P

(Park) to R (Reverse).

1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is

stopped.

2. Turn the key to ON while depressing the foot

brake pedal.

The selector lever can be moved to R (Reverse)

from any of the D (Drive) positions within 3

minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the

ACC or OFF position.

3. Move the selector lever to P (Park).

4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK to remove the

key.

N (Neutral):

Neither forward or reverse is engaged. The

engine can be started in this position. You may

shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine

P (Park):

Use this selector position when the vehicle is

5-12 Starting and driving

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

system as soon as possible.

(MIL)” in the “2. Instrument and controls”

section. This will occur even if all electrical

circuits are functioning properly. In this

case, turn the ignition key OFF and wait for

10 seconds. Then turn the key back to the

ONposition. The vehicle should return to

its normal operating condition. If it does

not return to its normal operating condi-

tion, have your NISSAN dealer check the

transmission and repair if necessary.

Accelerator downshift

— In D position —

For rapid passing or hill climbing, fully depress

the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the

transmission down into lower range, depending

on the vehicle speed.

High fluid temperature protection

mode

WARNING

This transmission has a high fluid temperature

protection mode. If the fluid temperature be-

comes too high (for example, when climbing

steep grades in high temperature with heavy

loads, such as when towing a trailer), engine

power and, under some conditions, vehicle

speed will be decreased automatically to reduce

the chance of transmission damage. Vehicle

speed can be controlled with the accelerator

pedal, but the vehicle may not accelerate above

approximately 40 to 50 MPH (65 to 80 km/h).

When the high fluid temperature protec-

tion mode or fail-safe operation occurs,

vehicle speed may be gradually re-

duced. On highways, the reduced speed

may be lower than other traffic which

could increase the chance of a collision.

Be especially careful when driving. If

necessary, pull to the side of the road at

a safe place and allow the transmission

to return to normal operation, or have it

repaired if necessary.

SSD0290

Shift lock release

If the battery charge is low or discharged, the

selector lever may not be moved from the P

(Park) position even with the brake pedal de-

pressed.

To move the selector lever, depress the brake

pedal, remove the cover using a suitable tool and

push the shift lock release button. The selector

lever can be moved to N (Neutral). This allows

the vehicle to be moved if the battery is dis-

charged.

Fail-safe

If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-

ditions, such as excessive wheel spinning

and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe

system may be activated. The MIL may

come on to indicate the fail-safe mode is

activated, see “Malfunction indicator lamp

If the selector lever cannot be moved out of P

(Park), have your NISSAN dealer check the CVT

Starting and driving 5-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

shift the selector lever into a driving gear.

M-CVT (CVT with Manual shift mode)

Gate type shift with manual mode

CAUTION

2. Release the parking brake and foot brake,

then gradually start the vehicle in motion.

When stopping the vehicle on an uphill

grade, do not hold the vehicle by de-

pressing the accelerator pedal. The foot

brakes should be used for this purpose.

The M-CVT in your vehicle is electronically con-

trolled by a transmission control module to pro-

duce maximum power and smooth operation.

WARNING

Shown on the following pages are the recom-

mended operating procedures for this transmis-

sion. Follow these procedures for maximum ve-

hicle performance and driving enjoyment.

Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N

(Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or

manual shift mode. Always depress

the brake pedal until shifting is com-

pleted. Failure to do so could cause

you to lose control and have an acci-

dent.

Starting the vehicle

After starting the engine, fully depress the foot

brake pedal before shifting the selector lever to

the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D (Drive) or manual

shift mode position. Be sure the vehicle is fully

stopped before attempting to shift the selector

lever.

Cold engine idle speed is high, so use

caution when shifting into a forward

or reverse gear before the engine has

warmed up.

This M-CVT is designed so that the foot

brake pedal MUST be depressed before

shifting from P (Park) to any drive position

while the ignition switch is ON.

Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)

while vehicle is moving forward.

Never shift to P (Park) or D (Drive)

while vehicle is moving rearward.

These could cause an accident.

The selector lever cannot be moved out of

P (Park) and into any of the other gear

positions if the ignition key is turned to the

LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if the key is

removed from the ignition switch.

On slippery roads, do not downshift.

This may cause a loss of control.

1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and

5-14 Starting and driving

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P (Park):

or roll away and result in serious per-

sonal injury or property damage.

Use this selector position when the vehicle is

parked or when starting the engine. Make sure

the vehicle is completely stopped. For maximum

safety, depress the brake pedal, then move the

lever to the P (Park) position. The brake pedal

must be depressed any time the selector

lever is moved to P (Park). Apply the parking

brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking

brake first, then move the lever to the P (Park)

position.

If the key is turned to OFF or ACC for any reason

while the vehicle is in R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or

any D (Drive) position, the key cannot be turned

to LOCK and be removed from the ignition

switch. Additionally, the selector lever cannot be

moved to R (Reverse) from N (Neutral) or any D

(Drive) position for about 3 minutes after the

ignition switch is turned to the ACC or OFF

position. The selector lever can be moved from R

(Reverse) to P (Park) with the key in the OFF or

ACC position. If this occurs, perform the follow-

ing steps:

CAUTION

SSD0289

Use this position only when the vehicle

is completely stopped.

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress the brake

pedal and shift the selector lever from P (Park) to

R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D (Drive), Manual shift

mode or any of the desired shift positions.

1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is

stopped.

R (Reverse):

2. Turn the key to ON.

Use this position to back up. Always be sure the

vehicle is completely stopped when selecting R

(Reverse). The brake pedal must be de-

pressed to move the selector lever from P

(Park) to R (Reverse).

3. Depress the foot brake pedal if the vehicle is

in the N (Neutral) or any D (Drive) position.

WARNING

4. If necessary, move the selector lever to P

(Park) or N (Neutral) to restart the vehicle (P

is preferred) or move the selector lever to P

(Park) to park the vehicle.

Apply the parking brake if the selector

lever is in any position while the engine

is not running. Failure to do so could

cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly

The selector lever can be moved to R (Reverse)

from any of the D (Drive) positions within 3

minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the

ACC or OFF position.

5. Turn the ignition key to LOCK to remove the

key.

Starting and driving 5-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

N (Neutral):

M4 (Fourth), M3 (Third) and M2 (Second):

transmission returns to the normal driving

mode.

Neither forward or reverse gear is engaged. The

engine can be started in this position. You may

shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine

while the vehicle is moving.

Use for hill climbing or engine braking on down-

hill grades.

In the manual shift mode, the transmis-

sion may not shift to the selected gear.

This helps maintain driving performance

and reduces the chance of vehicle dam-

age or loss of control.

M1 (First):

Use this position when climbing steep hills

slowly or driving slowly through deep snow,

sand or mud, or for maximum engine braking on

steep downhill grades.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

Manual shift mode

When the CVT fluid temperature is extremely

low, the manual shift mode may not work and

automatically shift as a drive mode. This is not

a malfunction. In this case, return the selector

lever to D range and drive for a while and then

shift to the manual shift mode.

Remember not to drive at high speeds for

extended periods of time in lower than M6

range. This reduces fuel economy.

When the selector lever is shifted from D to the

manual shift gate with the vehicle stopped or

while driving, the transmission enters the manual

shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manu-

ally.

When shifting up, move the selector lever to

the + (up) side. (Shifts to higher range.)

When the CVT fluid temperature is high, the

shift range may upshift in lower rpm than

usual. This is not a malfunction.

When shifting down, move the selector lever

to the − (down) side. (Shifts to lower range.)

In the manual shift mode, the shift range is

displayed on the position indicator in the meter.

Moving the selector lever to the same side

twice will shift the ranges in succession.

However, if this motion is rapidly done, the

second shifting may not be completed prop-

erly.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:

→

←

→

←

→

←

→

←

→

←

M6 (Sixth):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

M5 (Fifth):

In the manual shift mode, the transmis-

sion automatically shifts down to M1

(First) before the vehicle comes to a

stop. When accelerating again, it is nec-

essary to shift up to the desired range.

For driving up or down long slopes where engine

braking would be advantageous.

When canceling the manual shift mode, re-

turn the selector lever to the D position. The

5-16 Starting and driving

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

If it is necessary to park the vehicle, push the

shift lock release button, then move the shift

lever to the P (Park).

ing on the vehicle speed.

High fluid temperature protection

mode

To push the shift lock release button, follow the

procedure as illustrated.

This transmission has a high fluid temperature

protection mode. If the fluid temperature be-

comes too high (for example, when climbing

steep grades in high temperature with heavy

loads, such as when towing a trailer), engine

power and, under some conditions, vehicle

speed will be decreased automatically to reduce

the chance of transmission damage. Vehicle

speed can be controlled with the accelerator

pedal, but the vehicle may not accelerate above

approximately 40 to 50 MPH (65 to 80 km/h).

If the lever cannot be moved out of P (Park), have

your NISSAN dealer check the CVT system as

soon as possible.

WARNING

If the selector lever cannot be moved

from the P (Park) position while the

engine is running and the brake

pedal is depressed, the stop lights

may not work. Malfunctioning stop

lights could cause an accident injur-

ing yourself and others.

SSD0352

Shift lock release

Fail-safe

If the battery is discharged, the selector lever

may not be moved from the P (Park) position

even with the brake pedal depressed.

If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-

ditions, such as excessive wheel spinning

and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe

system may be activated. The MIL may

come on to indicate the fail-safe mode is

activated, see “Malfunction indicator lamp

(MIL)” in the “2. Instrument and controls”

section. This will occur even if all electrical

circuits are functioning properly. In this

case, turn the ignition key OFF and wait for

10 seconds. Then turn the key back to the

ONposition. The vehicle should return to

its normal operating condition. If it does

To move the selector lever, push the shift lock

release button while depressing the foot brake

and applying the parking brake. The selector

lever can be moved to N (Neutral). This allows

the vehicle to be moved if the battery is dis-

charged, after releasing the parking brake.

Do not park the vehicle without shift-

ing to the P (Park) position.

Accelerator downshift

— In D position —

If the battery is discharged in N (Neutral), D

(Drive) or Manual shift mode, the select lever

may not be moved to the P (Park) position.

For passing or hill climbing, fully depress the

accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the

transmission down into the lower gear, depend-

Starting and driving 5-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PARKING BRAKE

not return to its normal operating condi-

tion, have your NISSAN dealer check the

transmission and repair if necessary.

WARNING

Be sure the parking brake is fully

released before driving. Failure to do

so can cause brake failure and lead

to an accident.

WARNING

When the high fluid temperature protec-

tion mode or fail-safe operation occurs,

vehicle speed may be gradually re-

duced. On highways, the reduced speed

may be lower than other traffic which

could increase the chance of a collision.

Be especially careful when driving. If

necessary, pull to the side of the road at

a safe place and allow the transmission

to return to normal operation, or have it

repaired if necessary.

Do not release the parking brake

from outside the vehicle.

Do not use the gear shift in place of

the parking brake. When parking, be

sure the parking brake is fully en-

gaged.

SPA1286B

To apply: Fully depress the parking brake pedal.

To release:

Do not leave children unattended in a

vehicle. They could release the park-

ing brake and cause an accident.

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Depress the parking brake pedal and the

parking brake will be released.

3. Before driving, be sure the brake warning

light goes out.

5-18 Starting and driving

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CRUISE CONTROL (if so

equipped)

The SET indicator light may blink when the

cruise control main switch is turned on while

pushing the ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, or

CANCEL switch (located on the steering

wheel). To properly set the cruise control

system, perform the preceding steps in the

order indicated.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when driv-

ing under the following conditions:

it is not possible to keep the vehicle

at a set speed.

in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies

in speed.

on winding or hilly roads.

on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,

etc.).

SSD0297

in very windy areas.

1. ACCEL or RESUME switch

2. COAST or SET switch

3. ON/OFF switch

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle

control and result in an accident.

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE

CONTROL

4. CANCEL switch

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

If the cruise control system malfunctions, it

cancels automatically. The SET indicator light

on the meter panel then blinks to warn the

driver.

The cruise control allows driving at a speed

between 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144 km/h)

without keeping your foot on the accelerator

pedal.

If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the

cruise control main switch off and have the

system checked by your NISSAN dealer.

To turn on the cruise control, push the main

switch on. The CRUISE indicator light on the

meter panel will come on.

Starting and driving 5-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To set at cruising speed, accelerate your

vehicle to the desired speed, push the

COAST/SET switch and release it. (The SET

indicator light will come on.) Take your foot off

the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain

the set speed.

proximately 8 MPH (13 km/h).

speed will decrease by about 1 MPH (1.6

km/h).

Move the selector lever to N (Neutral) posi-

tion. The SET indicator light will go out.

To resume the preset speed, push and re-

lease the RES/ACCEL set switch. The vehicle

will resume the last set cruising speed when the

vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one

of the following three methods:

To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-

celerator pedal. When you release the pedal,

the vehicle will return to the previously set

speed.

a) Depress the accelerator pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push and

release the COAST/SET switch.

b) Push and hold the ACCEL/RES set switch.

When the vehicle attains the speed you

desire, release the switch.

The vehicle may not maintain the set speed

when going up or down steep hills. If this

happens, drive without the cruise control.

c) Push, then quickly release the ACCEL/RES

set switch. Each time you do this, the set

speed will increase by about 1 MPH (1.6

km/h).

To cancel the preset speed, follow either of

these three methods:

a) Push the cancel switch; The SET indicator

light will go out.

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one

b) Tap the brake pedal; The SET indicator light

will go out.

of the following three methods:

a) Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle

attains the desired speed, push the

COAST/SET switch and release it.

c) Turn the main switch off. Both the CRUISE

indicator and SET indicator lights will go out.

If you depress the brake pedal while pushing

the ACCEL/RES set switch and reset at the

cruising speed, turn the main switch off once

and then turn it on again.

b) Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-

lease the switch when the vehicle slows

down to the desired speed.

c) Push, then quickly release the COAST/

SET switch. Each time you do this, the set

The cruise control will automatically be can-

celled if the vehicle slows down below ap-

5-20 Starting and driving

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), follow

these recommendations to obtain maximum en-

gine performance and ensure the future reliability

and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to

follow these recommendations may result in

shortened engine life and reduced engine per-

formance.

Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain

cruising speeds with a constant accelerator

position.

leave the windows closed to reduce drag.

Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.

Driving at high speed will lower fuel economy.

Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.

Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-

hicles.

Avoid driving for long periods at constant

speed, either fast or slow. Do not run the

engine over 4,000 rpm.

Use a proper gear range which suits road

conditions. On level roads, shift into high gear

as soon as possible.

Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

Avoid quick starts.

Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

Keep your engine tuned up.

Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles

(800 km).

Follow the recommended periodic mainte-

nance schedule.

Keep the tires inflated at the correct pres-

sure. Low pressure will increase tire wear and

waste fuel.

Keep the front wheels in correct alignment.

Improper alignment will cause not only tire

wear but also lower fuel economy.

Air conditioner operation lowers fuel

economy. Use the air conditioner only when

necessary.

When cruising at highway speeds, it is more

economical to use the air conditioner and

Starting and driving 5-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

USING ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD)

(if so equipped)

SSD0292

Type A

SSD0391

Type B

or unexpected vehicle movement which

could result in serious vehicle damage

or personal injury.

WARNING

vehicle equipped with AWD (All-

Wheel Drive) should never be tested

using a two wheel dynamometer, similar

to the dynamometers used by some

states for emissions testing, or similar

equipment. Make sure you inform the

test facility personnel that your vehicle

is an AWD equipped vehicle before it is

placed on a dynamometer. Failure to do

so may result in transmission damage

5-22 Starting and driving

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

AWD LOCK SWITCH OPERATIONS

WARNING

The AWD system is used to select OFF/AUTO, ON/LOCK depending on the driving conditions.

The AWD system electronically controls the coupling.

Do not place an AWD equipped ve-

hicle on a two wheel dynamometer or

raise two wheels off the ground and

shift the transmission to any D (drive)

or R (reverse) position. Doing so may

result in transmission damage or un-

expected vehicle movement which

could result in serious vehicle dam-

age or personal injury.

Push the AWD LOCK switch to move between each mode OFF/AUTO and ON/LOCK, depending

on driving conditions.

AWD LOCK

Wheel driven

indicator

light

Use conditions

switch

Distribution of torque to the front and

rear wheels changes automatically,

depending on road conditions en-

countered [100:0]↔ [50:50].

This results in improved driving stabil-

ity.

OFF/AUTO

ON/LOCK

Goes off.

For driving on paved or slippery roads

When driving straight, shift the AWD

lock switch to OFF/AUTO or

ON/LOCK. Do not operate the AWD

lock switch when making a turn or

backing up.

*1 ALL wheel drive

AWD LOCK For driving on rough roads

*1 LOCK mode will change to AUTO mode automatically, when the vehicle is accelerated or the vehicle speed is

over approximately 19 MPH (30 km/h). The AWD LOCK indicator light does not go off.

Do not operate the AWD lock switch

(OFF/AUTO and ON/LOCK) with the

front wheel spinning.

If the AWD LOCK switch is operated while accelerating or decelerating, or if the key switch is

turned off while in the OFF/AUTO or ON/LOCK position, you may feel a jerk. This is normal.

Engine idling speed is high while

warming up the engine. Be especially

careful when starting or driving on

slippery surfaces with the AWD lock

switch set in OFF/AUTO.

The oil temperature of power train parts will increase if the vehicle is continuously operated under

conditions where the difference in rotation between the front and rear wheels is large (wheel slip)

such as when driving the vehicle on rough roads through sand, mud or freeing a stuck vehicle. In

these cases, the AWD warning light blinks rapidly and the AWD mode changes to 2WD to protect

the power train parts. If you stop driving with the engine idling and wait until the warning light stops

blinking, the AWD returns to the OFF/AUTO mode.

Starting and driving 5-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

If any malfunction occurs in the AWD system

when the key switch is ON, the warning light will

remain illuminated.

When turning the vehicle in

ON/LOCK mode on paved roads, you

may feel a braking effect. This is a

normal condition of the AWD model.

High-temperature power-train oil due to continu-

ous operation of the vehicle to free a stuck

vehicle makes the warning light blink rapidly

(about twice per second). The driving mode may

change to 2 wheel drive. OFF/AUTO mode may

change to ON/LOCK mode before the warning

light blinks. This is normal. If the warning light

blinks rapidly during operation, stop the vehicle

with the engine idling in a safe place immedi-

ately. Then if the light goes off after a while, you

can continue driving.

A large difference between the diameters of

front and rear wheels will make the warning light

blink slowly (about once per two seconds). Pull

off the road in a safe area, and idle the engine.

Check that all tire sizes are the same, tire

pressure is correct and tires are not worn.

SSD0314A

WARNING

AWD WARNING LIGHT

Do not attempt to test an AWD

equipped vehicle with two wheels on a

two wheel dynamometer and the other

two wheels raised. Doing so may result

The AWD warning light is located in the meter.

The AWD warning light comes on when the key

switch is turned to ON. It turns off soon after the

engine is started.

5-24 Starting and driving

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

in transmission damage or unex-

pected vehicle movement which

could result in serious vehicle dam-

age or personal injury.

If the warning light is still on after the

above operation, have your vehicle

checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon

as possible.

The power-train may be damaged if

you continue driving with the warning

light blinking rapidly.

CAUTION

If the warning light comes on while

driving, OFF/AUTO mode will be

changed to 2 wheel drive mode. Re-

duce the vehicle speed and have your

vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer

as soon as possible.

When the warning light comes on,

the 2 wheel drive may be engaged

even if the driving mode is in

OFF/AUTO or ON/LOCK. Be espe-

cially careful when driving.

Never drive on dry hard surface roads

in the ON/LOCK mode, as this will

overload the power-train and may

cause a serious malfunction.

Starting and driving 5-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

WARNING

Safe parking procedures require that

both the parking brake be set and the

transmission placed into P (Park).

Failure to do so could cause the ve-

hicle to move unexpectedly or roll

away and result in an accident.

Make sure the selector lever has

been pushed as far forward as it can

go and cannot be moved without de-

pressing the button at the end of the

lever.

MSD0002

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

WARNING

2. Move the selector lever to the P (Park) posi-

tion.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into

the street when parked on a sloping drive

way, it is a good practice to turn the wheels

as illustrated.

Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags. They may

ignite and cause a fire.

HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB:

Turn the wheels into the curband move the

vehicle forward until the curbside wheel

gently touches the curb.

Never leave the engine running while

the vehicle is unattended.

Never leave children unattended in

the vehicle.

5-26 Starting and driving

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

POWER STEERING

BRAKE SYSTEM

HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB:

The power assisted steering is designed to use

a hydraulic pump, driven by the engine, to assist

steering.

BRAKING PRECAUTIONS

Turn the wheels away from the curband

move the vehicle back until the curb side

wheel gently touches the curb.

The brake system has two separate hydraulic

circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still

have braking at two wheels.

If the engine stops or drive belt breaks, you will

still have control of the vehicle. However, much

greater steering effort is needed, especially in

sharp turns or at low speeds.

HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO

Vacuum assisted brake

CURB:

The brake booster aids braking by using engine

vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the

vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,

greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be

required to stop the vehicle and the stopping

distance will be longer.

Turn the wheels toward the side of the road

so the vehicle will move away from the center

of the road if it moves.

WARNING

4. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position

and remove the key.

If the engine is not running or is turned

off while driving, the power assist for

the steering will not work. Steering will

be much harder to operate.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven through

water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your

braking distance will be longer and the vehicle

may pull to one side during braking.

To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed

while lightly tapping the brake pedal to heat-up

the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to

normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds

until the brakes function correctly.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while

driving. This will cause overheating of the brakes,

increases wear on the brake linings and pads,

and reduces gas mileage.

Starting and driving 5-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To help save the brakes and to prevent the

brakes from overheating, reduce speed and

downshift to a lower gear before going down a

slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may

reduce braking performance and could result in

loss of vehicle control.

By preventing wheel lockup, the system helps

the driver maintain steering control and helps to

minimize swerving and spinning on slippery sur-

faces.

may indicate that road conditions are hazardous

and extra care is required while driving.

Self-test feature

The anti-lock brake system consists of electronic

sensors, electric pumps, and hydraulic solenoids

controlled by a computer. The computer has a

built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system

each time you start the engine and move the

vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse.

When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk

noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal.

This is normal and is not an indication of any

malfunction. If the computer senses any mal-

function, it switches the anti-lock brake system

OFF and turns on the ABS warning light in the

meter. The brake system will then behave nor-

mally, but without anti-lock assistance.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

WARNING

While driving on a slippery surface,

be careful when braking, accelerat-

ing or downshifting. Abrupt braking

or accelerating could cause the

wheels to skid and result in an acci-

dent.

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so

may result in increased stopping dis-

tances.

Normal operation

If the engine is not running or is

turned off while driving, the power

assist for the brakes will not work.

Braking will be harder.

The anti-lock brake system will not operate at

speeds below 3 to 6 MPH (5 to 10 km/h) to

completely stop the vehicle. (The speeds will

vary according to road conditions.) When the

anti-lock system senses that one or more wheels

are close to locking up, the actuator (under the

hood) rapidly applies and releases hydraulic

pressure (like pumping the brakes very quickly).

While the actuator is working, you may feel a

pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or

vibration from the actuator under the hood. This

is normal and indicates that the anti-lock system

is working properly. However, the ABS operation

If the light comes on during the self check, or

while you are driving, you should take your

vehicle to your NISSAN dealer for repair at your

earliest convenience.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

The anti-lock brake system controls the brakes

at each wheel so the wheels will not lock when

braking abruptly or when braking on slippery

surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed

at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure

to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding.

WARNING

The anti-lock brake system is a sophis-

ticated device, but it cannot prevent ac-

5-28 Starting and driving

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL

(VDC) SYSTEM (if so equipped)

When driving on slippery surfaces or suddenly

avoiding obstacles on roads, the vehicle might

swerve or slip. With the vehicle dynamic control

(VDC) system, sensors detect these movements

and control the braking and engine output to

help improve vehicle stability while driving. The

system also varies the brake fluid pressure to

prevent each wheel from locking.

spinning wheel which distributed the driving

power to the other drive wheel. If the vehicle is

operated with the vehicle dynamic control sys-

tem turned off, all VDC and traction control

functions will be turned off. The ABLS and ABS

system will still operate with the VDC system off.

If the ABLS system or the ABS system is

activated, the slip indicator light will blink and

you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsa-

tion in the brake pedal. This is also normal and

indicates the brake fluid pressure is controlled

properly.

cidents resulting from careless or dan-

gerous driving techniques. It can help

maintain vehicle control during braking

on slippery surfaces, but remember that

the stopping distance on slippery sur-

faces will be longer than on normal

surfaces, even with the anti-lock sys-

tem. Stopping distances may also be

longer on rough, gravel or snow covered

roads, or if you are using tire chains.

Always maintain a safe distance from

the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately,

the responsibility for safety of self and

others rests in the hands of the driver.

When the VDC system is operating, the slip

indicator in the instrument panel blinks.

When only the traction control system portion

of the VDC system is operating, the slip

indicator will also blink.

While the VDC system is operating, you may feel

a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or

vibration from under the hood. This is normal and

indicates that the VDC system is working prop-

erly.

If the slip indicator blinks, the vehicle is under

slippery conditions. Be sure to drive carefully.

See “Slip indicator light”, and “VDC off indi-

cator light” in the “2. Instruments and con-

trols” section.

Tire type and condition of tires may also

affect braking effectiveness.

The computer has a built in diagnostic feature

that tests the system each time you start the

engine and move the vehicle forward or in

reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test

occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a

pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is

not an indication of a malfunction.

When replacing tires, install the

specified size of tires on all four

wheels.

Indicator light

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the

SLIP and

indicator lights come on in

the meter panel.

As long as these warning lights are on, the

traction control function is canceled.

When installing a spare tire, make

sure it is the proper size and type as

specified on the tire placard. See

“Vehicle identification” in the “9.

Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section for tire placard location.

The VDC uses an Active Brake Limited Slip

(ABLS) system to improve vehicle traction. The

Active Brake Limited Slip system works when

one of the driving wheels in spinning on a

slippery surface. The ABLS system brakes the

WARNING

The vehicle dynamic control system

Starting and driving 5-29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

is designed to help improve driving

stability but does not prevent acci-

dents due to abrupt steering opera-

tion at high speeds or by careless or

dangerous driving techniques. Re-

duce vehicle speed and be especially

careful when driving and cornering

on slippery surfaces and always drive

carefully.

come on.

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply

de-icer or glycerin to it through the key hole. If

the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before

inserting it into the key hole.

When driving on extremely inclined

surfaces such as higher banked cor-

ners, the vehicle dynamic control sys-

tem may not operate properly and the

vehicle dynamic control off indicator

light may come on. Do not drive on

these types of roads.

ANTIFREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated that the

temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check

antifreeze to assure proper winter protection. For

additional information, see “Engine cooling sys-

tem” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”

section.

If the tires other than the recom-

mended ones are used, the vehicle

dynamic control system may not op-

erate properly or the vehicle dynamic

control off indicator light may come

on.

If engine related parts such as muf-

fler are not standard equipment or

are extremely deteriorated, the ve-

hicle dynamic control off indicator

light and slip indicator light may

come on.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during extremely

cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may

freeze and damage the battery. To maintain

maximum efficiency, the battery should be

checked regularly. For additional information,

see “Battery” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section.

The vehicle dynamic control system

is not a substitute for winter tires or

tire chains on a snow covered road.

Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-

sion. The vehicle dynamic control

system may not operate correctly.

When the vehicle is on a conveyance

such as a ferry, the vehicle dynamic

control off indicator light and slip

indicator light may come on. This is

not a malfunction. Restart the engine

after departing the conveyance.

If suspension parts such as shock

absorbers, struts, springs and bush-

ings are not standard equipment or

are extremely deteriorated, the ve-

hicle dynamic control system may not

operate properly and the vehicle dy-

namic control off indicator light may

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-

freeze, drain the cooling system by opening the

drain plug located under the radiator. Refill

before operating the vehicle. See “Engine cool-

ing system” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section for changing engine coolant.

5-30 Starting and driving

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

the chain manufacturer’s suggestions. Use

only SAE Class S chains. Class “S” chains

are used on vehicles with restricted tire to

vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use

Class “S” chains are designed to meet the

SAE standard minimum clearances between

the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or

body component required to accommodate

the use of a winter traction device (tire chains

or cables). The minimum clearances are de-

termined using the factory equipped tire size.

Other types may damage your vehicle. Use

chain tensioners when recommended by the

tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit.

Loose end links of the tire chain must be

secured or removed to prevent the possibility

of whipping action damage to the fenders or

underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading

your vehicle when using tire chains. In addi-

tion, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise,

your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle

handling and performance may be adversely

affected.

which are clear of snow. Driving with chains in

such conditions can cause damage to the vari-

ous mechanisms of the vehicle due to some

overstress.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires are of a tread design to

provide superior performance on dry pave-

ment. However, the performance of these

tires will be substantially reduced in snowy

and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle

on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recommends

the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON

tires on all four wheels. Please consult your

NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size, speed

rating and availability information.

4. For all wheel drive:

If you install snow tires, they must also be the

same size, brand, construction and tread

pattern on all four wheels.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items be

carried in the vehicle during winter:

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded

tires may be used. However, some provinces

and states prohibit their use. Check local,

state and provincial laws before installing

studded tires.

a scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove

ice and snow from the windows and wiper

blades.

a sturdy, flat board to be placed under the

jack to give it firm support.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded

snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be

poorer than that of non-studded snow

tires.

a shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow-drifts.

extra window washer fluid to refill the reser-

voir tank.

3. Tire chains may be used if desired. Make sure

they are of proper size for the tires on your

vehicle and are installed according to the

chain manufacturer’s suggestions. Use of tire

chains may be prohibited according to loca-

tion. Check the local laws before installing

tire chains. When installing tire chains, make

sure they are of proper size for the tires on

your vehicle and are installed according to

Never install tire chains on TEMPO-

RARY USE ONLY spare tires.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

Do not use tire chains on dry roads.

WARNING

Tire chains must be installed only on the

front wheels and not on the rear wheels.

Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),

Do not drive with tire chains on paved roads

Starting and driving 5-31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

very cold snow or ice can be slick and

very hard to drive on. The vehicle will

have a lot less traction or grip under

these conditions. Try to avoid driving

on wet ice until the road is salted or

sanded.

Do not use cruise control on slippery

roads.

Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep snow

clear of the exhaust pipe and from

around your vehicle.

Whatever the condition, drive with

caution. Accelerate and slow down

with care. If accelerating or down-

shifting too fast, the drive wheels will

lose even more traction.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so

equipped)

An engine block heater to assist extreme cold

temperature starting is available through your

NISSAN dealer.

Allow more stopping distance under

these conditions. Braking should be

started sooner than on dry pavement.

WARNING

Allow greater following distances on

slippery roads.

Do not use your heater with an un-

grounded electrical system or two-

pronged (cheater) adapters. You can be

injured by an electrical shock if you use

an ungrounded connection.

Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).

These may appear on an otherwise

clear road in shaded areas. If a patch

of ice is seen ahead, brake before

reaching it. Try not to brake while

actually on the ice, and avoid any

sudden steering maneuvers.

5-32 Starting and driving

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 In case of emergency

Flat tire...................................................................................... 6-2

Low tire pressure warning system (if so

equipped)........................................................................... 6-2

Changing a flat tire.......................................................... 6-2

Jump starting........................................................................... 6-8

Push starting......................................................................... 6-10

If your vehicle overheats.................................................... 6-10

Towing your vehicle............................................................ 6-11

Towing recommended by NISSAN........................... 6-12

Vehicle recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle) ............. 6-14

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FLAT TIRE

LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

sible. Serious vehicle damage could

occur and may lead to an accident

and could result in serious personal

injury. Check the tire pressure for all

four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to

the recommended COLD tire pres-

sure shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label to turn the low tire

pressure warning light OFF. If the

light still comes on while driving after

adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may

be flat. If you have a flat tire, replace

it with a spare tire as soon as pos-

sible.

sure sensors.

This vehicle is equipped with the low tire pres-

sure warning system, which displays the pres-

sure of each tire independently (except the spare

tire) on the display screen by sending a signal

from a sensor that is installed in each wheel. If

the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure

(lower than 27 psi, 190 kPa), the low tire

pressure warning system will activate and warn

you of it by the low tire pressure warning light.

This system will activate only when the vehicle is

driven at speeds above 20 MPH (32 km/h). For

more details, please refer to “Warning/indicator

lights and audible reminders” in the “2. Instru-

ments and controls” section, “Tire pressure in-

formation” in the “4. Display screen, heater, air

conditioner and audio systems” section and

“Low tire pressure warning system” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions

below.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road away

from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking

brake. Shift the selector lever into P (Park)

position.

When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel is replaced, the pressure of

that tire will not be indicated or moni-

tored by the low tire pressure warn-

ing system. Contact your NISSAN

dealer as soon as possible for tire

replacement and/or system reset-

ting.

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic, and to

signal professional road assistance person-

nel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle

and stand in a safe place, away from traffic

and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

If the light comes on while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneuvers or

abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,

pull off the road to a safe location

and stop the vehicle as soon as pos-

Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pres-

WARNING

Make sure that the parking brake is

6-2 In case of emergency

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

securely applied and the selector le-

ver is shifted into P (Park).

Never change tires when the vehicle

is on a slope, ice or slippery areas.

This is hazardous.

Never change tires if oncoming traffic

is close to your vehicle. Wait for pro-

fessional road assistance.

When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel is replaced, the pressure of

that tire will not be indicated and not

be monitored by the low tire pressure

warning system. Contact your

NISSAN dealer as soon as possible

for tire replacement and/or system

resetting. (For models with the low

tire pressure warning system)

MCE0001

Blocking wheels

Place suitable blocks at both the front and back

of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to

prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked

up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the ve-

hicle may move and could cause per-

sonal injury.

SCE0433

In case of emergency 6-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Getting the spare tire and tools

Pull up the floor cover and hang the strap k to

upper body k as illustrated. Remove the under

tray k (if so equipped).

Type A:

Turn the retainer counterclockwise

move the spare tire.

and re-

Type B:

Turn the retainer counterclockwise 1 , remove

the subwoofer

and remove the spare tire.

SCE0434

SCE0446

Pull up the floor cover

as illustrated and

Removing wheel cap

remove

the jack and tools.

CAUTION

Do not use your hands to pry off wheel

caps. Doing so could result in personal

injury.

6-4 In case of emergency

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SCE0435

CE1092

The jack should be used on level firm

ground.

Jacking up vehicle and removing the

damaged tire

WARNING

2. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by

turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut

wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts

until the tire is off the ground.

Carefully read the caution label attached to

the jack body and the following instruc-

tions.

Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by the jack.

Use only the jack provided with your

vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use

the jack provided with your vehicle

on other vehicles.

The jack is designed only for lifting

your vehicle during a tire change.

1. Place the jack directly under the jack-up point

as illustrated above so that top of the jack

contacts the vehicle at the jack up point.

Align the jack head between the two notches

in the front or the rear as shown. Also fit the

groove of the jack head between the notches

as shown.

3. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears

the ground. To lift the vehicle, securely hold

the jack lever and rod with both hands as

shown above. Remove the wheel nuts, and

then remove the tire.

In case of emergency 6-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches

the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench,

tighten the wheel nuts securely in the se-

Use the correct jack up points; never

use any other part of the vehicle for

jack support.

quence illustrated ( 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 , 5 ).

k k k k k

Lower the vehicle completely.

Never jack up the vehicle more than

necessary.

WARNING

Never use blocks on or under the

jack.

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly

tightened wheel nuts can cause the

wheel to become loose or come off.

This could cause an accident.

Do not start or run engine while ve-

hicle is on the jack, as it may cause

the vehicle to move. This is especially

true for vehicles with limited slip dif-

ferential carriers.

Do not use oil or grease on the wheel

studs or nuts. This could cause the

nuts to become loose.

SCE0039

Installing the spare tire

Do not allow passengers to stay in

the vehicle while it is on the jack.

The spare tire is designed for emergency

use. See specific instructions under the

heading “Wheels and tires” in the “8. Main-

tenance and do-it-yourself ” section of this

manual.

Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle

has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km)

(also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel

nuts to the specified torque with a torque

wrench.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface

between the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten the

wheel nuts with your fingers.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

80 ft-lb (108 N⋅m)

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel

nuts alternately and evenly until they are tight.

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to

specification at all times. It is recom-

6-6 In case of emergency

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

mended that wheel nuts be tightened to

specification at each lubrication interval.

The spare tire is designed for emer-

gency use. See specific instructions

under the heading “Wheels and tires”

in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

COLD pressure:

After vehicle has been parked for three

hours or more or driven less than 1 mile

(1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire

and Loading Information label affixed to

the driver side center pillar.

For models equipped with the low tire

pressure warning system:

SCE0436

After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD tire

pressure, the display of the tire pressure infor-

mation may show higher pressure than the

COLD tire pressure after the vehicle has been

driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km). This is because

the tire pressurizes as the tire temperature rises.

This does not indicate a system malfunction.

5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip-

ment in the vehicle.

6. Close the floor cover.

WARNING

Always make sure that the spare tire

and jacking equipment are properly

secured after use. Such items can

become dangerous projectiles in an

accident or sudden stop.

In case of emergency 6-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

JUMP STARTING

To start your engine with a booster battery, the

instructions and precautions below must be

followed.

The booster battery must be rated at

12 volts. Use of an improperly rated

battery can damage your vehicle.

WARNING

Whenever working on or near a bat-

tery, always wear suitable eye protec-

tors (for example, goggles or indus-

trial safety spectacles) and remove

rings, metal bands, or any other jew-

elry. Do not lean over the battery

when jump starting.

If done incorrectly, jump starting can

lead to a battery explosion, resulting

in severe injury or death. It could also

damage your vehicle.

Explosive hydrogen gas is always

present in the vicinity of the battery.

Keep all sparks and flames away

from the battery.

Do not attempt to jump start a frozen

battery. It could explode and cause

serious injury.

Your vehicle has an automatic en-

gine cooling fan. It could come on at

any time. Keep hands and other ob-

jects away from it.

Do not allow battery fluid to come

into contact with eyes, skin, cloth or

painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a

corrosive sulphuric acid solution

which can cause severe burns. If the

fluid should come into contact with

anything, immediately flush the con-

tacted area with water.

Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

6-8 In case of emergency

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CAUTION

Always connect positive (+) to posi-

tive (+) and negative (−) to body

ground (for example, strut mounting

bolt, etc. — not to the battery).

Make sure that cables do not touch

moving parts in the engine compart-

ment and that clamps do not contact

any other metal.

SCE0479

5. Start the engine of the other vehicle and let it

run for a few minutes.

to the P (Park) position. Switch off all unnec-

essary electrical systems (light, heater, air

conditioner, etc.).

WARNING

6. Keep the engine speed of the other vehicle at

about 2,000 rpm, and start your engine in the

normal manner.

Always follow the instructions below.

Failure to do so could result in damage

to the charging system and cause per-

sonal injury.

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so

equipped). Cover the battery with an old

cloth as illustrated to reduce explosion haz-

ard.

CAUTION

Do not keep starter motor engaged for

more than 10 seconds. If the engine

does not start right away, turn the key

off and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying

again.

4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence as

illustrated (k → k → k → k).

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,

position the two vehicles to bring their bat-

teries into close proximity to each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply parking brake. Move the selector lever

In case of emergency 6-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PUSH STARTING

Do not start the engine by pushing.

CAUTION

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

WARNING

7. After starting your engine, carefully discon-

nect the negative cable and then the positive

cable.

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be

sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover the

vent holes as it may be contaminated with

corrosive acid.

Do not continue to drive if your ve-

hicle overheats. Doing so could

cause a vehicle fire.

CVT models cannot be push started.

Attempting to do so may cause trans-

mission damage.

To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never remove the radiator cap while

the engine is still hot. When the ra-

diator cap is removed, pressurized

hot water will spurt out, possibly

causing serious injury.

Do not open the hood if steam is

coming out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an

extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if

you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal

noise, etc., take the following steps:

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the

parking brake and move the selector lever to

the P (Park) position.

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner switch. Open all

the windows, move the heater or air condi-

tioner temperature control to maximum hot

6-10 In case of emergency

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

and fan control to high speed.

When towing your vehicle, all State, provincial

and local regulations for towing must be fol-

lowed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam-

age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail-

able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service

operators are generally familiar with the appli-

cable laws and procedures for towing. To assure

proper towing and to prevent accidental damage

to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a

service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable

to have the service operator carefully read the

following precautions.

WARNING

3. If engine overheating is caused by climbing a

long hill on a hot day, run the engine at a fast

idle (approximately 1,500 rpm) until the tem-

perature gauge indication returns to normal.

Be careful not to allow your hands,

hair, jewelry or clothing to come into

contact with, or to get caught in the

cooling fan, or drive belt.

4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for

steam or coolant escaping from the radiator

before opening the hood. Wait until no steam

or coolant can be seen before proceeding.

The engine cooling fan can start at

any time when the coolant tempera-

ture is high.

5. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

7. After the engine cools down, check the cool-

ant level in the reservoir tank with the engine

running. Add coolant to the reservoir tank if

necessary. Have your vehicle repaired at the

nearest NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the

engine, stand clear to prevent getting

burned.

Never ride in a vehicle that is being

towed.

Never get under your vehicle after it

has been lifted by a tow truck.

6. Visually check if the cooling fan is running.

The radiator hoses and radiator should not

leak water.

CAUTION

If coolant is leaking or the cooling fan does

not run, stop the engine.

When towing, make sure that the

transmission, axles, steering system

and powertrain are in working condi-

tion. If any unit is damaged, dollies

In case of emergency 6-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

must be used.

Always attach safety chains before

towing.

SCE0438

TOWING R^TE^wC^{o w}O^heM^elM^drivE^eN^moD^deE^lsD BY

NISSAN

on the ground (forward or backward)

as this may cause serious and expen-

sive damage to the transmission.

If it is necessary to tow the vehicle

with the rear wheels raised, always

use towing dollies under the front

wheels.

Two wheel drive models

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be

towed with the driving (front) wheels off the

ground or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as

illustrated.

When towing CVT models with the

front wheels on towing dollies:

CAUTION

•

Turn the ignition key to the OFF

position, and secure the steering

Never tow CVT models with the front

wheels on the ground or four wheels

6-12 In case of emergency

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

wheel in a straight ahead position

with rope or similar device.

Never secure the steering wheel

by turning the ignition key to the

LOCK position. This may damage

the steering lock mechanism.

•

Move the selector lever to the N

(Neutral) position.

When towing two wheel drive CVT

model with the rear wheels on the

ground (if you do not use towing

dollies): Always release the parking

brake.

SCE0439

All wheel dri^Av^le^{l wh}m^eeo^{l d}d^rie^vels^models

NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be

used when towing your vehicle or the vehicle be

placed on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

Never tow CVT AWD models with any of

the wheels on the ground as this may

cause serious and expensive damage to

the drive train.

In case of emergency 6-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CAUTION

Use the towing hook only, not other

parts of the vehicle. Otherwise, the

vehicle body will be damaged.

Use the towing hook only to free a

vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.

Never tow the vehicle for a long dis-

tance using only the towing hook.

The towing hook is under tremen-

dous force when used to free a stuck

vehicle. Always pull the cable straight

out from the front of the vehicle.

Never pull on the hook at an angle.

SCE0440

SCE0444

VEHICLE RECOVERY (Freeing a

stuck vehicle)

WARNING

Remove the towing hook cover from the

bumper using a suitable tool.

Pulling devices should be routed so they do

not touch any part of the suspension, steer-

ing, brake or cooling systems.

Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

Do not spin the tires at a high speed.

This could cause them to explode

and result in serious injury. Parts of

your vehicle could also overheat and

be damaged.

Securely install the towing hook stored with

jacking tools.

Always pull the cable straight out from the

front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull on the

vehicle at an angle.

Make sure that the hook is properly secured in

the stored place after use.

Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas

straps are not recommended for use in ve-

hicle towing or recovery.

6-14 In case of emergency

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior .................................................................... 7-2

Washing ............................................................................. 7-2

Waxing................................................................................ 7-2

Removing spots................................................................ 7-3

Underbody ......................................................................... 7-3

Glass ................................................................................... 7-3

Aluminum alloy wheels.................................................... 7-3

Chrome parts .................................................................... 7-3

Cleaning interior..................................................................... 7-3

Floor mats .......................................................................... 7-4

Seat belts........................................................................... 7-4

Corrosion protection ............................................................. 7-5

Most common factors contributing to vehicle

corrosion............................................................................. 7-5

Environmental factors influence the rate of

corrosion............................................................................. 7-5

To protect your vehicle from corrosion ...................... 7-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

In order to maintain the appearance of your

vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

Avoid leaving water spots on the paint surface

by using a damp chamois to dry the vehicle.

CAUTION

In the following cases, please wash your vehicle

as soon as possible to protect the paint surface.

WAXING

Do not use strong household soap,

strong chemical detergents, gasoline

or solvents.

Regular waxing protects the paint surface and

helps retain new vehicle appearance. After wax-

ing, polishing is recommended to remove

built-up residue and to avoid a weathered ap-

pearance.

After a rainfall to prevent possible damage

from acid rain

Do not wash the vehicle in direct

sunlight or while the vehicle body is

hot, as the surface may become

water-spotted.

After driving on coastal roads

When contaminants such as soot, bird drop-

pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on

the paint surface

If you wish to wax your vehicle, only use a wax

specified for use over clear coats, such as

Nissan Liquid or Spray Wax. Your NISSAN

dealer can assist you in choosing the proper

product.

Avoid using tight-napped or rough

cloths, such as washing mitts. Care

must be taken when removing

caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-

stances so that the paint surface is

not scratched or damaged.

When dust or mud builds up on the surface

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle

inside a garage or in a covered area.

Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-

ing. Follow the instructions supplied with the

wax.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in a

shady area or protect the vehicle with a body

cover.

Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,

cutting compounds or cleaners that may

damage the vehicle finish.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surface

when putting on or removing the body

cover.

Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of clean

water.

If the surface does not polish easily, use a

road tar remover and wax again.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,

hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to

the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas

must be regularly cleaned. Make sure that the

drain holes in the lower edge of the door are

open. Spray water under the body and in the

wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away

road salt.

WASHING

Machine compounding or aggressive pol-

ishing on a base coat/clear coat paint

finish may dull the finish or leave swirl

marks.

Thoroughly rinse surface dirt off the vehicle with

a wet sponge and plenty of clean water. Clean

the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap such as

Nissan Car Wash, or a general purpose dish-

washing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm

(never hot) water.

7-2 Appearance and care

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CLEANING INTERIOR

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior

trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum

cleaner or soft brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather

surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in

mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry

soft cloth. Before using any fabric protector,

read the manufacturer’s recommendations.

Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that

may stain or bleach the seat material.

REMOVING SPOTS

abrasive cleaners or chlorine based dis-

infectant cleaners. They could damage

the electrical conductors, radio antenna

elements or rear window defogger ele-

ments.

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,

and tree sap as quickly as possible from the

surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or

staining. Special cleaning products are available

at your NISSAN dealer or any automotive acces-

sory store.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

UNDERBODY

Use a cloth dampened only with water, to clean

the meter and gauge lens.

Wash regularly, especially during winter months

in areas where road salt is used. Salt could

discolor the wheel if not removed.

In areas where road salt is used in winter, the

underbody must be cleaned regularly. This will

prevent dirt and salt from building up and caus-

ing underbody and suspension corrosion. Be-

fore the winter period and again in the spring, the

underseal must be checked and, if necessary,

re-treated.

CAUTION

CHROME PARTS

Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-

abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

Never use gasoline, thinner, or any

similar material.

GLASS

The leather seats should be regularly

coated with a leather wax like saddle

soap. Never use car wax.

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film

from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to

become coated with a film after the vehicle is

parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft

cloth will easily remove this film.

Never use fabric protectors unless

recommended by the manufacturer.

Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on

meter or gauge lens covers. It may

damage the lens cover.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the win-

dow, do not use sharp-edged tools,

Appearance and care 7-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FLOOR MATS

SEAT BELTS

The use of Genuine Nissan floor mats can

extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it

easier to clean the interior. No matter what

mats are used, be sure they are fitted for

your vehicle and are properly positioned in

the footwell to prevent interference with

pedal operation. Mats should be maintained

with regular cleaning and replaced if they be-

come excessively worn.

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them

with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.

Allow the belts to dry completely before using

them.

WARNING

Do not allow wet belts to roll up in the

retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or

chemical solvents since these may se-

verely weaken the seat belt webbing.

SAI0025

Floor mat positioning aid

(Driver side only)

This model includes a front floor mat bracket k

to act as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN

floor mats have been specially designed for your

vehicle model. The driver’s side floor mat has a

grommet hole incorporated in it. Simply position

the mat by placing the floor mat bracket through

the floor mat grommet hole while centering the

mat in the floorpan contour.

Periodically check to make certain that the mats

are properly positioned.

7-4 Appearance and care

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CORROSIONPROTECTION

MOST COMMON FACTORS

CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE

CORROSION:

Temperature

CAUTION

A temperature increase will accelerate the rate

of corrosion to those parts which are not well

ventilated.

NEVER remove dirt, sand or other

debris from the passenger compart-

ment by washing it out with a hose.

Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or

broom.

The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt

and debris in body panel sections, cavities,

and other areas.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air

in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use will

accelerate the corrosion process. Road salt will

also accelerate the disintegration of paint sur-

faces.

Damage to paint and other protective coat-

ings caused by gravel and stone chips or

minor traffic accidents.

Never allow water or other liquids to

come in contact with electronic com-

ponents inside the vehicle as this

may damage them.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS

INFLUENCE THE RATE OF

CORROSION:

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE

FROM CORROSION:

Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the

vehicle clean.

Moisture

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are

extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion

and deterioration of underbody components

such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,

brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the

vehicle body underside can accelerate corro-

sion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely

inside the vehicle, and should be removed for

drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.

Always check for minor damage to the paint

and repair it as soon as possible.

Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors

open to avoid water accumulation.

In winter, the underbody must be cleaned

periodically.

Relative humidity

Check the underbody for accumulation of

sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water

as soon as possible.

For additional protection against rust and corro-

sion, which may be required in some areas,

consult your local NISSAN dealer.

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high

relative humidity, especially those areas where

the temperatures stay above freezing and where

atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is

used.

Appearance and care 7-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MEMO

7-6 Appearance and care

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements .................................................. 8-2

General maintenance............................................................ 8-2

Explanation of general maintenance items ................ 8-2

Maintenance precautions..................................................... 8-5

Engine compartment check locations ............................. 8-7

Engine cooling system.......................................................... 8-8

Checking engine coolant level...................................... 8-8

Changing engine coolant............................................... 8-9

Engine oil ................................................................................. 8-9

Checking engine oil level............................................... 8-9

Changing engine oil...................................................... 8-10

Changing engine oil filter ............................................ 8-11

CVT fluid................................................................................ 8-12

Power steering fluid............................................................ 8-12

Brake fluid ............................................................................. 8-12

Window washer fluid.......................................................... 8-13

Battery.................................................................................... 8-14

Jump starting .................................................................. 8-15

Drive belts ............................................................................. 8-15

Spark plugs........................................................................... 8-16

Replacing spark plugs.................................................. 8-16

Air cleaner ............................................................................. 8-16

Windshield wiper blades................................................... 8-17

Cleaning........................................................................... 8-17

Replacing......................................................................... 8-18

Rear window wiper blade ................................................. 8-19

Parking brake and brake pedal........................................ 8-19

Checking parking brake............................................... 8-19

Checking brake pedal .................................................. 8-20

Brake booster................................................................. 8-20

Fuses ...................................................................................... 8-21

Engine compartment..................................................... 8-21

Passenger compartment.............................................. 8-22

Keyfobbattery replacement.............................................. 8-22

Lights ..................................................................................... 8-24

Headlights ...................................................................... 8-25

Exterior and interior lights............................................ 8-26

Wheels and tires ................................................................. 8-27

Tire pressure................................................................... 8-27

Tire labeling..................................................................... 8-30

Types of tires.................................................................. 8-31

Tire chains....................................................................... 8-32

Changing wheels and tires ......................................... 8-33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

Your new NISSAN has been designed to have

minimum maintenance requirements with longer

service intervals to save you both time and

money. However, some day-to-day and regular

maintenance is essential to maintain your

NISSAN’s good mechanical condition, as well

as its emission and engine performance.

Performing general maintenance checks require

minimal mechanical skill and only a few general

automotive tools.

During the normal day-to-day operation of the

vehicle, general maintenance should be per-

formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If

you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or

smell, be sure to check for the cause or have

your NISSAN dealer check it promptly. In addi-

tion, you should notify your NISSAN dealer if you

think that repairs are required.

These checks or inspections can be done by

yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer,

your NISSAN dealer.

Where to go for service:

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that

scheduled maintenance, as well as general

maintenance, is performed.

If maintenance service is required or your vehicle

appears to malfunction, have the systems

checked and tuned by a NISSAN dealer.

When performing any checks or maintenance

work, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-

tions” later in this section.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who

can ensure that your vehicle receives the proper

maintenance care. You are a vital link in the

maintenance chain.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists

and are kept up to date with the latest service

information through technical bulletins, service

tips, and in-dealership training programs. They

are completely qualified to work on NISSAN

vehicles before they work on your vehicle,

rather than after they have worked on it.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following

items with “*” is found later in this section.

Scheduled maintenance:

For your convenience, both required and op-

tional scheduled maintenance items are de-

scribed and listed in your “Service and Mainte-

nance Guide”. You must refer to that guide to

ensure that necessary maintenance is performed

on your NISSAN at regular intervals.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

performed from time to time, unless otherwise

specified.

You can be confident that your NISSAN dealer’s

service department performs the best job to

meet the maintenance requirements of your ve-

hicle — in a reliable and economic way.

Doors and engine hood: Check that all doors

and the engine hood operate smoothly. Also

make sure that all latches lock securely. Lubri-

cate if necessary. Make sure that the secondary

latch keeps the hood from opening when the

primary latch is released.

General maintenance:

General maintenance includes those items

which should be checked during normal day-to-

day operation. They are essential for proper

vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to

perform these procedures regularly as pre-

scribed.

When driving in areas using road salt or other

corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis.

Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail

lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all

operating properly and installed securely. Also

check headlight aim.

Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely

with the selector lever in the P (Park) position

without applying any brakes.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular

basis. Check the windshield at least every six

months for cracks or other damage. Have a

damaged windshield repaired by a qualified re-

pair facility.

Parking brake*: Check that the lever has the

proper travel and make sure that the vehicle is

held securely on a fairly steep hill when only the

parking brake is applied.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking

the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,

and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if

necessary.

Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks

or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt

system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters

and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,

and are installed securely. Check the belt web-

bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every

7,500 miles (12,000 km). However, the timing

for tire rotation may vary according to your

driving habits and road surface conditions.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked on a regular basis, such as when

performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the

vehicle, etc.

Seats: Check seat position controls such as

seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure

they operate smoothly and that all latches lock

securely in every position. Check that the head

restraints move up and down smoothly and that

the locks hold securely in all latched positions.

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often

and always prior to long distance trips. If neces-

sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the

spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully

for damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for

smooth operation and make sure the pedal does

not catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor

mats away from the pedal.

Tire, wheel alignment and balance: If the

vehicle should pull to either side while driving on

a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven

or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for

wheel alignment.

Steering wheel: Check for changes in the

steering conditions, such as excessive free play,

hard steering or strange noises.

Brake pedal and booster*: Check the pedal

for smooth operation and make sure it has the

proper distance under it when depressed fully.

Check the brake booster function. Be sure to

keep floor mats away from the pedal.

Warning lights and chimes: Make sure that all

warning lights and chimes are operating prop-

erly.

If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal

highway speeds, wheel balancing may be

needed.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the

vehicle to one side when applied.

Windshield defroster: Check that the air

comes out of the defroster outlets properly and

in good quantity when operating the heater or air

conditioner.

For additional information regarding tires, refer to

“Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

P (Park) position mechanism: On a fairly

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that

the wipers and washer operate properly and that

the wipers do not streak.

and driving” in the “5. Starting and driving”

section for exhaust gas (carbon monoxide).)

exterior” in the “7. Appearance and care” sec-

tion.

Windshield washer fluid*: Check that there is

adequate fluid in the tank.

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel,

oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has

been parked for a while. Water dripping from the

air conditioner after use is normal. If you should

notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,

check for the cause and have it corrected imme-

diately.

Under the hood and the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked periodically (for example, each time you

check the engine oil or refuel).

Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell. It

should be between the MAX and MIN lines.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under

severe conditions require frequent checks of the

battery fluid level.

Power steering fluid level* and lines: Check

the level in the reservoir tank with the engine off.

Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,

cracks, etc.

Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake

fluid level is between the MAX and MIN lines on

the reservoir.

Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the

radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,

etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the

hoses have no cracks, deformation, deterioration

or loose connections.

Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level

when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts*: Make sure that no belt is

Underbody: The underbody is frequently ex-

posed to corrosive substances such as those

used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very

important to remove these substances, other-

wise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel

lines and around the exhaust system. At the end

of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly

flushed with plain water, being careful to clean

those areas where mud and dirt may accumu-

late. For additional information, see “Cleaning

frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level*: Check the level on the

dipstick after parking the vehicle on a level spot

and turning off the engine.

Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose

supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the

exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of

exhaust fumes, immediately locate the trouble

and correct it. (See “Precautions when starting

8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

When performing any inspection or maintenance

work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent

serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to

the vehicle. The following are general precau-

tions which should be closely observed.

hair and tools away from moving

fans, belts and any other moving

parts.

be serviced by a NISSAN dealer be-

cause the fuel lines are under high

pressure even when the engine is off.

It is advisable to secure or remove

any loose clothing and any jewelry,

such as rings, watches, etc. before

working on your vehicle.

WARNING

CAUTION

Park the vehicle on a level surface,

apply the parking brake securely and

block the wheels to prevent the ve-

hicle from moving. Move the selector

lever to the P (Park) position.

Do not work under the hood while

the engine is hot. Turn off the engine

and wait until it cools down.

Always wear eye protection when-

ever you work on your vehicle.

If you must run the engine in an

enclosed space such as a garage, be

sure there is proper ventilation for

exhaust gases to escape.

Never connect or disconnect either

the battery or any transistorized

component connector while the igni-

tion key is on.

Be sure the ignition key is OFF or

LOCK when performing any parts re-

placement or repairs.

Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by a jack. If it is nec-

essary to work under the vehicle,

support it with safety stands.

Never leave the engine or the CVT

related component harness connec-

tor disconnected while the ignition

key is on.

Your vehicle is equipped with an au-

tomatic engine cooling fan. It may

come on at any time without warning,

even if the ignition key is in the OFF

position and the engine is not run-

ning. To avoid injury, always discon-

nect the negative battery cable be-

fore working near the fan.

Keep smoking materials, flame and

sparks away from fuel and the bat-

tery.

Avoid direct contact with used engine

oil and coolant. Improperly disposed

engine oil, engine coolant and/or

other vehicle fluids can hurt the envi-

ronment. Always conform to local

regulations for disposal of vehicle

fluid.

On gasoline engine models with the

Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) Sys-

tem, the fuel filter or fuel lines should

If you must work with the engine

running, keep your hands, clothing,

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

This “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section

gives instructions regarding only those items

which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is also avail-

able. See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual or-

der information” in the “9. Technical and con-

sumer information” section.

You should be aware that incomplete or im-

proper servicing may result in operating difficul-

ties or excessive emissions, and could affect

your warranty coverage. If in doubt about any

servicing, have it done by your NISSAN

dealer.

8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

1. Power steering fluid reservoir

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Brake fluid reservoir

4. Air cleaner

5. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

6. Engine coolant reservoir

7. Radiator filler cap

8. Engine oil dipstick

9. Fuse/fusible link holder

10. Battery

SDI1492

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory

with a high-quality, year-round, antifreeze cool-

ant solution. The antifreeze solution contains rust

and corrosion inhibitors, therefore additional

cooling system additives are not necessary.

WARNING

Never remove the radiator cap when

the engine is hot. Serious burns

could be caused by high pressure

fluid escaping from the radiator. Wait

until the engine and radiator cool

down.

CAUTION

When adding or replacing coolant, be

sure to use only a Genuine NISSAN

Long Life Antifreeze Coolant or equiva-

lent with the proper mixture ratio of 50%

antifreeze and 50% demineralized

water/distilled water. The use of other

types of coolant solutions may damage

your engine cooling system.

See “If your vehicle overheats” in the

“6. In case of emergency” section.

The radiator is equipped with a pres-

sure cap. To prevent engine damage,

use only a genuine NISSAN radiator

cap.

SDI1493

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT

LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank

when the engine is cold. If the coolant level is

below MIN, add coolant up to the MAX level. If

the reservoir tank is empty, add the coolant to

the reservoir tank up to the MAX level.

Deminer-

alized

water/

distilled

Outside temperature

down to

Anti-

freeze

°C

°F

water

If the engine cooling system frequently

requires coolant, have it checked by your

NISSAN dealer.

−35

−30

50%

8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ENGINE OIL

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil

level. It should be between the H and L

marks. If the oil level is below the L mark,

remove the oil filler cap and pour recom-

mended oil through the opening. Do not

overfill.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

Contact your NISSAN dealer if replacement is

required.

Major cooling system repairs should be per-

formed by your NISSAN dealer. The service

procedures can be found in the appropriate

NISSAN Service Manual.

6. Recheck oil level with dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oil

maintenance intervals or during the

break-in period, depending on the severity

of operating conditions.

Improper servicing can result in reduced

heater performance and engine overheating.

WARNING

CAUTION

To avoid being scalded, never change

the coolant when the engine is hot.

SDI0534

Oil level should be checked regularly.

Operating with insufficient amount of

oil can damage the engine, and such

damage is not covered by warranty.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

Never remove the radiator cap when

the engine is hot. Serious burns

could be caused by high pressure

fluid escaping from the radiator.

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches operating

temperature.

Avoid direct skin contact with used

coolant. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner

as soon as possible.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10

minutes for the oil to drain back into the

oil pan.

Keep coolant out of reach of children

and pets.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Rein-

sert it all the way.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6. Remove the drain plug with a wrench and

completely drain the oil.

CAUTION

If oil filter is to be changed, remove and

replace it at this time. See later in “Engine oil”

for changing engine oil filter.

Never pull out the oil level gauge while

filling engine oil.

CAUTION

See

“Capacities

and

recommended

fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Technical and con-

sumer information” section for drain and refill

capacity. The drain and refill capacity de-

pends on the oil temperature and drain time.

Use these specifications for reference only.

Always use the dipstick to determine the

proper amount of oil in the engine.

Be careful not to burn yourself, as the

engine oil is hot.

Waste oil must be disposed of properly.

Check your local regulations.

SDI0974

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

7. Clean and re-install the drain plug with a new

washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a

wrench.

9. Start the engine.

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

Check for leakage around the drain plug.

Correct as required.

Drain plug tightening torque:

2. Run the engine until it reaches operating

temperature.

10.Turn the engine off and wait more than 10

minutes. Check the oil level with the dip-

stick. Add engine oil if necessary.

22 to 29 ft-lb

(29 to 39 N⋅m)

3. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10

minutes.

Do not use excessive force.

11.Dispose of waste oil properly.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug.

5. Remove the oil filler cap.

8. Refill engine with recommended oil and in-

stall the cap securely.

WARNING

Prolonged and repeated contact with

8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4. Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface

with a clean rag.

used engine oil may cause skin can-

cer.

Be sure to remove any old rubber gasket

remaining on the mounting surface of the

engine.

Try to avoid direct skin contact with

used oil. If skin contact is made,

wash thoroughly with soap or hand

cleaner as soon as possible.

5. Coat the rubber gasket on the new filter with

clean engine oil.

Keep used engine oil out of reach of

children.

6. Screw in the oil filter until a slight resistance

is felt, then tighten additionally more than 2/3

turn.

Oil filter tightening torque:

11 to 15 ft-lb (15 to 20 N⋅m)

SDI0975

7. Start the engine and check for leakage

around the oil filter. Correct as required.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

8. Turn the engine off and wait several minutes.

Check the oil level. Add engine oil if neces-

sary.

2. Turn the engine off.

3. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench.

Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself, as the

engine oil may be hot.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CVT FLUID

POWER STEERING FLUID

BRAKE FLUID

Contact your NISSAN dealer if checking or

replacement is required.

CAUTION

Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid

NS-2. Do not mix with other fluids.

Using transmission fluid other than

Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will

damage the CVT transmission, which

is not covered by the NISSAN new

vehicle limited warranty.

SDI1443

SDI1502

The specified CVT fluid is also described on

caution labels located in the engine compart-

ment.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir tank.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid is

below the MIN line or the brake warning light

comes on, add Genuine Nissan Super Heavy

Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 (US

FMVSS No. 116) fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid

must be added frequently, the system should be

thoroughly checked by your NISSAN dealer.

The fluid level should be checked using the HOT

range at fluid temperatures of 122 to 176°F (50

to 80°C) or using the COLD range at fluid

temperatures of 32 to 86°F (0 to 30°C).

CAUTION

WARNING

Do not overfill.

Use Genuine NISSAN PSF or equiva-

lent.

Use only new fluid. Old, inferior, or con-

taminated fluid may damage the brake

system. The use of improper fluids can

8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WINDOW WASHER FLUID

damage the brake system and affect the

vehicle’s stopping ability.

WARNING

Antifreeze is poisonous and should be

stored carefully in marked containers

out of the reach of children.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on painted sur-

faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid

is spilled, wash with water.

CAUTION

Do not substitute engine antifreeze

coolant for window washer solution.

This may result in damage to the paint.

SDI1494

Add fluid when the low washer fluid warning light

comes on. Add a washer solvent to the water for

better cleaning. In the winter season, add a

windshield washer antifreeze. Follow the manu-

facturer’s instructions for the mixture ratio.

Recommended fluid is Genuine Nissan Wind-

shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-

freeze Fluid or equivalent.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BATTERY

Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Any

corrosion should be washed off with a solu-

tion of baking soda and water.

compounds. Wash hands after han-

dling.

Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid

in the battery is low. Low battery fluid

can cause a higher load on the bat-

tery which can generate heat, reduce

battery life, and in some cases lead

to an explosion.

Make certain the terminal connections are

clean and securely tightened.

If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or

longer, disconnect the (—) negative battery

terminal cable to prevent discharging it.

When working on or near a battery,

always wear suitable eye protection

and remove all jewelry.

WARNING

Do not expose the battery to flames

or electrical sparks. Hydrogen gas

generated by battery action is explo-

sive. Do not allow battery fluid to

contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or

painted surfaces. After touching a

battery or battery cap, do not touch

or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash

your hands. If the acid contacts your

eyes, skin or clothing, immediately

flush with water for at least 15 min-

utes and seek medical attention.

DI0137MA

Battery posts, terminals and related

accessories contain lead and lead

compounds. Wash hands after han-

dling.

Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be

between the UPPER LEVEL

and LOWER

LEVEL

lines.

If the side of the battery is not visible, the

electrolyte level can be checked through each

filler opening as illustrated.

Keep the battery out of the reach of

children.

If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled

water to bring the level to the indicator in each

filler opening. Do not overfill.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under

severe conditions require frequent checks of the

battery fluid level.

Battery posts, terminals and related

accessories contain lead and lead

1. Remove the cell plugs k.

8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DRIVE BELTS

2. Have the belts checked regularly for condi-

tion and tension.

SDI1480

SDI0141

2. Add distilled water up to the UPPER LEVEL

1 .

WARNING

3. Tighten cell plugs k.

Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or

LOCK position. The engine could rotate

unexpectedly.

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”

in the “6. In case of emergency” section. If the

engine does not start by jump starting, the

battery may have to be replaced. Contact your

NISSAN dealer.

1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of unusual

wear, cuts, fraying, oil adhesion or looseness.

If the belt is in poor condition or loose, have

it replaced or adjusted by your NISSAN

dealer.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPARK PLUGS

AIR CLEANER

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch

are off and that the parking brake is

engaged securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to

remove the spark plugs. An incorrect

socket can damage the spark plugs.

SDI0145

SDI1495

To remove the filter from the air cleaner, push

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Platinum-tipped spark plugs

down the lock pins

and pull the unit upward

2 .

It is not necessary to replace the platinum-tipped

spark plugs as frequently as the conventional

type spark plugs since they will last much longer.

Follow the maintenance log, but do not reuse

them by cleaning or regapping.

The filter element should not be cleaned and

reused. Replace it according to the maintenance

log shown in the separate Service and Mainte-

nance Guide. When replacing the filter, wipe the

inside of the air cleaner housing and the cover

with a damp cloth.

If replacement is required, see your NISSAN

dealer for servicing.

WARNING

Always

replace

with

recommended

platinum-tipped spark plugs.

Operating the engine with the air

8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

CAUTION

rinse the blade with clear water. If your wind-

shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades

and using the wiper, replace the blades.

cleaner removed can cause you or

others to be burned. The air cleaner

not only cleans the air, it stops flame

if the engine backfires. If it is not

there, and the engine backfires, you

could be burned. Do not drive with

the air cleaner removed and be care-

ful when working on the engine with

the air cleaner removed.

After wiper blade replacement, return

the wiper arm to its original position.

Otherwise it may be damaged when

the engine hood is opened.

Make sure the wiper blade contacts

the glass, otherwise the arm may be

damaged from wind pressure.

Never pour fuel into the throttle body

or attempt to start the engine with

the air cleaner removed. Doing so

could result in serious injury.

Worn windshield wiper blades can

damage the windshield and impair

driver vision.

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using the

windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters

when running, wax or other material may be on

the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a

washer solution or a mild detergent. Your wind-

shield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing

with clear water.

Clean the blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked

in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SDI1503

DI1018M

windshield and damaging the glass.

REPLACING

3. Push the lock pin, then remove the wiper

blade.

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position and the windshield wiper switch ON.

Turn the ignition switch OFF when the wiper

is in the fully up position. The wiper will stop

as illustrated.

4. Insert the new wiper blade to the wiper arm

until a click sounds.

The wiper should be in the fully up position

to avoid scratching the engine hood or

wiper arm.

2. Pull the wiper arm up.

Hold the wiper arm to avoid hitting the

8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADE

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE

PEDAL

Contact your NISSAN dealer if checking or

replacement is required.

SDI1391C

CHECKING PARKING BRAKE

From the released position, depress the parking

brake pedal slowly and firmly, and check the

notches between the initial and final positions of

the pedal. If it is out of the range shown above,

see your NISSAN dealer.

SDI1496

If you wax the surface of the hood, be

careful not to let wax get into the washer

nozzle. This may clog the nozzle k that

could cause improper windshield washer

operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, un-

clog it with a needle or small pin k.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BRAKE BOOSTER

WARNING

Check the brake booster function as follows:

1. With the engine off, press and release the

brake pedal several times. When brake pedal

movement (distance of travel) remains the

same from one pedal application to the next,

continue on to the next step.

See your NISSAN dealer and have it

checked if the brake pedal height does

not return to normal.

Brake pad wear indicators

2. While depressing the brake pedal, start the

engine. The pedal height should drop a little.

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have au-

dible wear indicators. When a brake pad re-

quires replacement, it will make a high pitched

scraping or screeching sound when the vehicle

is in motion whether or not the brake pedal is

depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as

possible if the wear indicator sound is heard.

3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop the

engine. Keeping the pedal depressed for

about 30 seconds, the pedal height should

not change.

DI1020MJ

4. Run the engine for one minute without de-

pressing the brake pedal, then turn it off.

Depress the brake pedal several times. The

pedal travel distance will decrease gradually

with each depression as the vacuum is re-

leased from the booster.

CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL

With the engine running, check the distance

between the upper surface of the pedal and the

metal floor. If it is out of the range shown above,

see your NISSAN dealer.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-

sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may

be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to

moderate stops is normal and does not affect

the function or performance of the brake system.

Self-adjusting brakes

If the brakes do not operate properly, see your

NISSAN dealer.

Proper brake inspection intervals should

be followed. For additional information, see the

separate Service and Maintenance Guide.

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting

brakes.

The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the

brake pedal is applied.

8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FUSES

system checked and repaired by your

NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

Fusible links

Never use a fuse of higher or lower

amperage rating than that specified on

the fuse box cover. This could damage

the electrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate and

fuses are in good condition, check the fusible

links. If any of these fusible links are melted,

replace only with genuine NISSAN parts.

SDI1504

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

If any electrical equipment does not operate,

check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition key and headlight switch

are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fusible link cover.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

5. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new fuse.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KEYFOB BATTERY

REPLACEMENT

SDI1505

NISSAN dealer.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

If any electrical equipment does not operate,

check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition key and the headlight

switch are OFF.

2. Pull to open the fuse box lid 1 .

SPA1374

3. Pinch the fuse perpendicularly with the fuse

Replace the battery as follows:

puller k and pull it out.

1. Open the lid using a suitable tool.

4. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new fuse

2. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery: Sanyo CR2025 or

equivalent

5. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked and repaired by your

8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Industry Canada. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions: (1) This de-

vice may not cause harmful interference,

and (2) this device must accept any inter-

ference received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation of the

device.

Make sure that the

bottom case.

side faces the

⊕

3. Close the lid securely.

4. Push the keyfobbutton two or three times to

check its operation.

See your NISSAN dealer if you need any assis-

tance for replacement.

If the battery is removed for any reason

other than replacement, perform step 4

above.

Be careful not to touch a circuit board

and a battery terminal.

An improperly disposed battery can

harm the environment. Always confirm

local regulations for battery disposal.

The keyfob is water-resistant; however,

if it does get wet, immediately wipe

completely dry.

When changing batteries, do not let

dust or oil get on the keyfob.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the manufacturer compliance

could void the user’s authority to operate

the equipment. This device complies with

Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LIGHTS

1. Front turn signal light or front park light

2. Headlight (low-beam, high-beam)

3. Front park light or front turn signal light

4. Map light

5. Ceiling light

6. Rear personal light

7. Front fog light (if so equipped)/Daytime, run-

ning light (for Canada)

8. Front side marker light

9. Step light

10. High-mounted stop light

Rear combination lights

11. Turn signal light (Rear combination lights)

12. Side marker light (Rear combination lights)

13. License plate lights

14. Back-up light

15. Luggage light

16. Stop/tail light (Rear combination lights)

SDI1497

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

HEADLIGHTS

CAUTION

Replacing

High pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the halogen bulb. The bulb

may break if the glass envelope is

scratched or the bulb is dropped.

If replacement is required, see a NISSAN dealer.

Xenon headlight bulb:

WARNING

When handling the bulb, do not touch

the glass envelope.

HIGH VOLTAGE

Do not touch the bulb.

Use the same number and wattage as

originally installed:

Bulb no. (Wattage)

D2R (35W) - Xenon low/high-beam

HB5 (65/55W) - Halogen low/high-

beam

When xenon headlights are on, they

produce a high voltage. To prevent an

electric shock, never attempt to modify

or disassemble the headlight assembly.

Always have your xenon headlights re-

placed at a NISSAN dealer. For addi-

tional information, see “Headlight and

turn signal switch” in the “2. Instru-

ments and controls” section.

Do not leave the bulb out of the

headlight reflector for a long period

of time as dust, moisture, and smoke

may enter the headlight body and

affect the performance of the head-

light.

Halogen headlight bulb:

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which

uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. If

replacement is required, see your NISSAN

dealer.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item

Front turn signal*

Wattage (W)

BulbNo.

T20

3.8

Front park light*

T10 C-2F

HB4

Front side marker light*

Front fog light (if so equipped)*

Rear combination light*

Turn signal

21/5

T20

Stop/Tail

Side marker light

T10

Back-up*

21CP

T10

License plate light*

High-mounted stop light*

Ceiling light

2.4

LED

Map light

MDI0006

Rear personal light*

Step light*

2.7

161

158

—

Replacement procedures

Luggage light

All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When

replacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or

cover.

Vanity mirror light (if so equipped)

*: See a NISSAN dealer for replacement.

8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHEELS AND TIRES

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including the spare)

often and always prior to long distance trips. The

recommended tire pressure specifications are

shown on the Tire and Loading Information label

under the “Recommended Cold Tire Inflation

Pressure” heading. The Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label is affixed to the driver side center

pillar. Tire pressures should be checked regu-

larly because:

Most tires naturally lose air over time.

Tires can lose air suddenly when driven over

potholes or other objects or if the vehicle

strikes a curbwhile parking.

SDI1498

SDI1500

The tire pressures should be checked when the

tires are cold. The tires are considered COLD

after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more

hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at

moderate speeds.

Incorrect tire pressure, including under in-

flation, may adversely affect tire life and

vehicle handling.

SDI1499

SDI1506

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

result in tire failure, loss of control

and possible injury.

WARNING

Improperly inflated tires can fail sud-

denly and cause an accident.

For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In-

formation” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

The vehicle weight capacity is indi-

cated on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label. Do not load your ve-

hicle

beyond

this

capacity.

Overloading your vehicle may result

in reduced tire life, unsafe operating

conditions due to premature tire fail-

ure, or unfavorable handling charac-

teristics and could also lead to a

serious accident. Loading beyond the

specified capacity may also result in

failure of other vehicle components.

Low tire pressure warning system (if

so equipped)

The low tire pressure warning system displays

the tire pressure of all tires (except the spare tire)

on the display screen by sending a signal from a

sensor that is installed in each wheel. For more

details, refer to “Low tire pressure warning light”

in the “2. Instruments and controls” section,

“Low tire pressure warning system” in the “5.

Starting and driving” section, and “Flat tire” in

the “6. In case of emergency” section. If the tire

pressure displayed on the display screen is

lower than the COLD tire pressure shown on the

Tire and Loading Information label, check the

pressure of all four tires and adjust them to the

COLD tire pressure as indicated above. The low

tire pressure warning system will activate only

when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 20

MPH (32 km/h).

Before taking a long trip, or when-

ever you heavily load your vehicle,

use a tire pressure gauge to ensure

that the tire pressures are at the

specified level.

Do not drive your vehicle over 85

MPH (137 km/h) unless it is equipped

with high speed rated tires. Driving

faster than 85 MPH (137 km/h) may

8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 Recommended cold tire inflation pressure:

Inflate the tires to this pressure when the tires

are cold. Tires are considered COLD after

the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more

hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at

moderate speeds. The recommended cold

tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to

provide the best tire wear and vehicle han-

dling characteristics based on the vehicles

GVWR.

5 Tire size — refer to “Tire labeling” later in this

section.

and

Spare tire size or compact spare tire

size (if so equipped)

Checking the tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto the

valve stem. Do not press too hard or force the

valve stem sideways, or air will escape. If the

hissing sound of air escaping from the tire is

heard while checking the pressure, reposition

the gauge to eliminate this leakage.

SDI1574

2 Vehicle load limit: See loading information in

the Technical and consumer information sec-

tion.

Tire and loading information label

3. Remove the gauge.

1 Seating capacity: The maximum number of

4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem

and compare it to the specification shown on

the Tire and Loading Information label.

occupants that can be seated in the vehicle.

3 Original tire size: The size of the tires origi-

nally installed on the vehicle at the factory.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too much air

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

is added, press the core of the valve stem

briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to

release pressure. Recheck the pressure and

add or release air as needed.

how much weight each tire can support. You

may not find this information on all tires

because it is not required by law.

H: Speed Rating. The speed rating denotes

the speed at which a tire is designed to be

driven for extended periods of time. The

ratings range from 98 miles per hour (MPH)

to 186 MPH. (You may not find this informa-

tion on all tires because it is not required by

law.)

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires, includ-

ing the spare. (Refer to the “Wheels and

tires” section)

TIRE LABELING

2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for new tire

Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place

standardized information on the sidewall of all

tires. This information identifies and describes

the fundamental characteristics of the tire and

also provides the tire identification number (TIN)

for safety standard certification. The TIN can be

used to identify the tire in case of a recall in case

of recall.

(example: DOT XX XX XXX XXXX)

DOT: Abbreviation for the “Department of

Transportation”. The symbol can be

placed above, below or to the left or

right of the Tire Identification Number.

1st two-digit code: Manufacturer’s identifica-

tion mark

SDI1575

1 Tire size (example: P215/60R16 94H)

P: The “P” indicates the tire is designed for

passenger vehicles. (Not all tires have this

information.)

2nd two-digit code: Tire size

Three-digit number (215): This number gives

the width in millimeters of the tire from side-

wall edge to sidewall edge.

Two-digit number (60): This number, known

as the aspect ratio, gives the tire’s ratio of

height to width.

3rd three-digit code: Tire type code (Op-

tional)

4th four-digit code: Date of Manufacture

Four numbers represent the week and year

the tire was built. For example, the numbers

3103 means the 31st week of 2003.

R: The “R” stands for radial.

Two-digit number (16): This number is the

wheel or rim diameter in inches.

Two- or three-digit number (94): This number

is the tire’s load index. It is a measurement of

8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3 Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-

coated fabric in the tire.

Tire manufacturers also must indicate the

materials in the tire, which include steel,

nylon, polyester, and others.

throughout this section, Intended Outboard

Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that contains a

whitewall, bears while lettering or bears manu-

facturer, brand and/or model name molding that

is higher or deeper than the same molding on the

other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the outward

racing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a

particular side that must always face outward

when mounted on a vehicle.

For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In-

formation” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

4 Maximum permissible inflation pressure

This number is the greatest amount of air

pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not

exceed the maximum permissible inflation

pressure.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies all season tires on some

models to provide good performance for use all

year round, including snowy and icy road condi-

tions. All season tires are identified by ALL

SEASON and/or M&S (Mud and Snow) on the

tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow trac-

tion than all season tires and may be more

appropriate in some areas.

TYPES OF TIRES

5 Maximum load rating

CAUTION

This number indicates the maximum load in

kilograms and pounds that can be carried by

the tire. When replacing the tires on the

vehicle, always use a tire that has the same

load rating as the factory installed tire.

When changing or replacing tires, be

sure all four tires are of the same

type (for example, summer, all sea-

son or snow) and construction. Your

NISSAN dealer may be able to help

you with information about tire type,

size, speed rating and availability.

Summer tires

6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models

to provide superior performance on dry roads.

Summer tire performance is substantially re-

duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not

have the tire traction rating M&S (Mud and

Snow) on the tire sidewall.

Indicates that the tire requires an inner tube

(“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).

7 The word “radial”

Replacement tires may have a lower

speed rating than the factory

equipped tires, and may not match

the potential maximum vehicle

speed. Never exceed the maximum

speed rating of the tire.

The word “radial” is shown, if the tire has

radial structure.

8 Manufacturer or Brand name

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy

conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of

snow tires or all season tires on all four wheels.

Manufacturer or Brand name is shown.

Other tire-related terminology

In addition to the many terms that are defined

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Snow tires

All wheel drive models

TIRE CHAINS

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select

tires equivalent in size and load rating to the

original equipment tires. If you do not, it can

adversely affect the safety and handling of your

vehicle.

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according

to location. Check the local laws before installing

tire chains. When installing tire chains, make

sure they are of proper size for the tires on your

vehicle and are installed according to the chain

manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE

class S chains. Class “S” chains are used on

vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.

Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are

designed to meet the SAE standard minimum

clearances between the tire and the closest

vehicle suspension or body component required

to accommodate the use of a winter traction

device (tire chains or cables). The minimum

clearances are determined using the factory

equipped tire size. Other types may damage

your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recom-

mended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure

a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must

be secured or removed to prevent the possibility

of whipping action damage to the fenders or

undercarriage. If possible, avoid fully loading

your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition,

drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your ve-

hicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling

and performance may be adversely affected.

CAUTION

Always use tires of the same size,

brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or

radial), and tread pattern on all four

wheels. Failure to do so may result in a

circumference difference between tires

on the front and rear axles which will

cause excessive tire wear and may dam-

age the transmission, transfer case and

differential gears.

Generally, snow tires will have lower speed

ratings than factory equipped tires and may not

match the potential maximum vehicle speed.

Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the

tire.

If you operate your vehicle in snowy or icy

conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of

snow or all season tires on all four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires

may be used. However, some provinces and

states prohibit their use. Check local, state and

provincial laws before installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow

tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may be poorer than

that of non-studded snow tires.

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended

that all four tires be replaced with tires of the

same size, brand, construction and tread pat-

tern. The tire pressure and wheel alignment

should also be checked and corrected as nec-

essary. Contact your NISSAN dealer.

Tire chains must be installed only on the

front wheels and not on the rear wheels.

Do not drive with tire chains on paved roads

which are clear of snow. Driving with chains in

such conditions can cause damage to the vari-

ous mechanisms of the vehicle due to some

overstress.

Never install tire chains on a TEMPO-

RARY USE ONLY type spare tire.

8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Do not use the chains on dry roads.

wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each

tire rotation interval.

Tire chains must be installed only on the

front wheels and not on the rear wheels.

WARNING

Do not drive with tire chains on paved roads

which are clear of snow. Driving with chains in

such conditions can cause damage to the vari-

ous mechanisms of the vehicle due to some

overstress.

After rotating the tires, adjust the tire

pressure.

Retighten the wheel nuts when the

vehicle has been driven for 600 miles

(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,

etc.).

Do not include the T-type spare tire

or any other small size spare tire in

the tire rotation.

SDI0724

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In-

formation” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the tires every

7,500 miles (12,000 km). See “Flat tire” in the

“6. In case of emergency” section for tire replac-

ing procedures.

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to

the specified torque with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

80 ft-lb (108 N⋅m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to speci-

fication at all times. It is recommended that

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

indicator is visible, the tire should be

replaced.

(bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread

patterns can adversely affect the ride,

braking, handling, ground clearance,

body-to-tire clearance, tire chain

clearance, speedometer calibration,

headlight aim and bumper height.

Some of these effects may lead to

accidents and could result in serious

personal injury.

Improper service for a spare tire may

result in serious personal injury. If it

is necessary to repair the spare tire,

contact your NISSAN dealer.

For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In-

formation” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

If the wheels are changed for any

reason, always replace with wheels

which have the same offset dimen-

sion. Wheels of a different offset

could cause premature tire wear, de-

grade vehicle handling characteris-

tics and/or interfere with the brake

discs/drums. Such interference can

lead to decreased braking efficiency

and/or early brake pad/shoe wear.

Refer to “Wheel/tire size” in the

“Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual for wheel

offset dimensions.

MDI0004

Replacing wheels and tires

Tire wear and damage

When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread

design, speed rating and load carrying capacity

as originally equipped. See “Specifications” in

the “9. Technical and consumer information”

section for recommended types and sizes of

tires and wheels.

WARNING

Tires should be periodically in-

spected for wear, cracking, bulging,

or objects caught in the tread. If ex-

cessive wear, cracks, bulging, or

deep cuts are found, the tire should

be replaced.

WARNING

The use of tires other than those

recommended or the mixed use of

tires of different brands, construction

When a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel is replaced, the pressure of

The original tires have a built-in tread

wear indicator. When the wear

8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Wheel balance service should be performed

with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing

the front wheels on the vehicle could lead to

mechanical damage.

Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or

involved in an accident.

that tire will not be indicated and not

be monitored by the low tire pressure

warning system. Contact your

NISSAN dealer as soon as possible

for tire replacement and/or system

resetting. (For models with the low

tire pressure warning system)

WARNING

For additional information regarding tires, refer to

“Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire

Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information booklet.

The spare tire should be used only for

emergency. It should be replaced by

the standard tire at the first opportu-

nity to avoid possible tire or differen-

tial damage.

Do not install a deformed wheel or

tire even if it has been repaired. Such

wheels or tires could have structural

damage and could fail without warn-

ing.

Care of wheels

Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle

to maintain their appearance.

Drive carefully while the TEMPO-

RARY USE ONLY spare tire is in-

stalled.

Clean the inner side of the wheels when the

wheel is changed or the underside of the

vehicle is washed.

The use of retread tire is not recom-

mended.

Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking

while driving.

Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing

the wheels.

For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In-

formation” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information booklet.

Periodically check spare tire inflation

pressure. Always keep the pressure

of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare

tire at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).

Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or

corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of

pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

NISSAN recommends waxing the road wheel

sidewalls to protect against road salt in areas

where it is used during winter.

With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY

spare tire installed, do not drive your

vehicle at speeds faster than 50 MPH

(80 km/h).

Wheel balance

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY

(T-type) spare tire)

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling

and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can

get out of balance. Therefore, they should be

balanced as required.

When driving on roads covered with

snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE

Observe the following precautions if the TEM-

PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ONLY spare tire should be used on

the rear wheel and the original tire

used on the front wheels (drive

wheels). Use tire chains only on the

front original tires.

CAUTION

Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-

RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire

chains will not fit properly and may

cause damage to the vehicle.

Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster

rate than the standard tire. Replace

the spare tire as soon as the tread

wear indicators appear.

Because the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire is smaller than the

original tire, ground clearance is re-

duced. To avoid damage to the ve-

hicle, do not drive over obstacles.

Also, do not drive the vehicle through

an automatic car wash since it may

get caught.

Do not use the spare tire on other

vehicles.

Do not use more than one spare tire

at the same time.

Do not tow a trailer while the TEM-

PORARY USE ONLY spare tire is in-

stalled.

8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MEMO

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MEMO

8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants................ 9-2

Fuel recommendation...................................................... 9-3

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation.................... 9-5

Recommended SAE viscosity number ....................... 9-6

Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant

Installing front license plate.............................................. 9-13

Vehicle loading information............................................... 9-14

Terms................................................................................ 9-14

Vehicle load capacity.................................................... 9-15

Loading tips .................................................................... 9-16

Payload weight capacity.............................................. 9-16

Measurement of weights ............................................. 9-16

Towing a trailer .................................................................... 9-17

Maximum load limits...................................................... 9-17

Towing load/specification chart................................. 9-19

Towing safety.................................................................. 9-19

Uniform tire quality grading............................................... 9-22

Emission control system warranty................................... 9-23

Reporting safety defects (US only) ................................ 9-23

Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test (US

only) ........................................................................................ 9-23

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order

recommendations............................................................. 9-6

Specifications.......................................................................... 9-7

Engine ................................................................................. 9-7

Wheels and tires.............................................................. 9-9

Dimensions and weights................................................ 9-9

When traveling or registering your vehicle in another

country.................................................................................... 9-10

Vehicle identification........................................................... 9-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate................ 9-10

Vehicle identification number (Chassis number)... 9-10

Engine serial number.................................................... 9-11

F.M.V.S.S. certification label....................................... 9-11

Emission control information label ............................ 9-11

Tire and loading information label............................. 9-12

Air conditioner specification label ............................. 9-12

information .......................................................................... 9-25

In the event of a collision ............................................ 9-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CAPACITIES AND

RECOMMENDED

FUEL/LUBRICANTS

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure

instructed in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate)

Recommended

specifications

measure

Imp

measure

Liter

Fuel

21-5/8 gal

18 gal

Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (RON 91)*1

Engine oil*6

Drain and refill

¼ API Certification Mark*2, *3

¼ API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I & II or API grade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving*2, *3

¼ ILSAC grade GF-I, GF-II & GF-III*2, *3

With oil filter change

Without oil filter change

Cooling system

4-1/4 qt

3-7/8 qt

3-1/2 qt

3-1/4 qt

4.0

3.7

With reservoir

Reservoir

9-3/4 qt

7/8 qt

—

8-1/8 qt

3/5 qt

—

9.2

0.8

—

Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent

Differential gear oil

CVT fluid

API GL-5, Viscosity SAE 80W-90*4

—

Genuine Nissan CVT Fluid NS-2*5

Transfer fluid

—

API GL-5, Viscosity SAE 80W-90

Power steering fluid (PSF)

Brake fluid

Genuine Nissan PSF or equivalent*7

Refill to the proper oil level according to the instructions in

the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

Genuine Nissan Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*8 or equivalent DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116)

NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)

Multi-purpose grease

Air conditioning system refrigerant

—

HFC-134a (R-134a)*9

Nissan A/C System Oil

Type S or exact equivalent

Air conditioning system lubricants

Windshield washer fluid

—

Genuine Nissan Windshield Washer Concentrate

Cleaner & Antifreeze Fluid or equivalent

*1: For additional information, see later in this paragraph for fuel recommendation.

*2: For additional information, see later in this paragraph for engine oil and oil filter recommendation.

*3: For additional information, see later in this paragraph for recommended SAE viscosity number.

*4: For hot climates, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 0°C (32°F).

*5: Use only Genuine Nissan CVT Fluid NS-2. Using transmission fluid other than Genuine Nissan CVT Fluid NS-2 will damage the CVT transmission, which

is not covered by the Nissan new vehicle limited warranty.

*6: For additional information, see “Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section for changing engine oil.

*7: For Canada, Nissan Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), DEXRON^TMIII/MERCON^TMor equivalent ATF may also be used.

*8: Available in mainland U.S.A through your NISSAN dealer.

*9: For additional information, see “Vehicle identification” in this section for air conditioner specification label.

9-2 Technical and consumer information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

tion to improve the emission control system and

vehicle performance. Ask your service station

manager if the gasoline meets the WWFC

specifications.

If an oxygenate-blend, excepting

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

methanol blend, is used, it should con-

tain no more than 10% oxygenate.

(MTBE may, however, be added up to

15%.)

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-

tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock

Index) number (Research octane number

91).

Reformulated gasoline

If a methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 5% methanol (me-

thyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It should

also contain a suitable amount of ap-

propriate cosolvents and corrosion in-

hibitors. If not properly formulated with

appropriate cosolvents and corrosion

inhibitors, such methanol blends may

cause fuel system damage and/or ve-

hicle performance problems. At this

time, sufficient data is not available to

ensure that all methanol blends are

suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles.

For

improved

vehicle

performance,

Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-

lated gasolines. These gasolines are specially

designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN

supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-

gests that you use reformulated gasoline when

available.

NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded

premium gasoline with an octane rating of

at least 91 AKI number (Research octane

number 96).

CAUTION

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing

oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and metha-

nol with or without advertising their presence.

NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of

which the oxygenate content and the fuel com-

patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily

determined. If in doubt, ask your service station

manager.

Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission con-

trol devices and systems, and could also

affect the warranty coverage.

If any undesirable driveability problems such as

engine stalling and hard hot starting are experi-

enced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, imme-

diately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel

with a low blend of MTBE.

Under no circumstances should

leaded gasoline be used, since this will

damage the three-way catalyst.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take

the following precautions as the usage of such

fuels may cause vehicle performance problems

and/or fuel system damage.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-

eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can

cause paint damage.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets

the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-

cations where it is available. Many of the auto-

mobile manufacturers developed this specifica-

The fuel should be unleaded and have

an octane rating no lower than that

recommended for unleaded gasoline.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of any

Technical and consumer information 9-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel in-

jector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve de-

posit removers, etc.) which are sold commer-

cially. Many of these additives intended for gum,

varnish or deposit removal may contain active

solvent or similar ingredients that can be harmful

to the fuel system and engine.

light spark knock for a short time while

accelerating or driving up hills. This is no

cause for concern, because you get the

greatest fuel benefit when there is light

spark knock for a short time under heavy

engine load.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating lower than stated above can cause

persistent, heavy spark knock. (Spark

knock is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-

vere, this can lead to engine damage. If you

detect a persistent heavy spark knock even

when using gasoline of the stated octane

rating, or if you hear steady spark knock

while holding a steady speed on level

roads, have your dealer correct the condi-

tion. Failure to correct the condition is

misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN is

not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing will result in knocking,

after-run or overheating. This in turn may cause

excessive fuel consumption or damage to the

engine. If any of the above symptoms are en-

countered, have your vehicle checked at a

NISSAN dealer or other competent service fa-

cility.

However, now and then you may notice

9-4 Technical and consumer information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

viscosity ratings specified for your vehicle.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil

additives. The use of an oil additive is not

necessary when the proper oil type is used and

maintenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has

been previously used should not be used.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes

with temperature. Because of this, it is important

that the engine oil viscosity be selected based

on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be

operated before the next oil change. The recom-

mended SAE viscosity number chart shows the

recommended oil viscosities for the expected

ambient temperatures. Choosing an oil viscosity

other than that recommended could cause seri-

ous engine damage.

STI0367

of the container should be used. This type of oil

supersedes the existing API SG, SH, or SJ and

Energy Conserving I & II categories.

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER

RECOMMENDATION

Selecting the correct oil

If you cannot find engine oil with the API certifi-

cation mark, use an API grade SG/SH, Energy

Conserving I & II or API grade SJ or SL, Energy

conserving oil. An oil with a single designation

SG or SH, or in combination with other catego-

ries (for example, SG/CC or SG/CD) may also

be used if one with the API certification mark

cannot be found. An ILSAC grade GF-I, GF-II or

GF-III oil can also be used.

It is essential to choose the correct quality, and

viscosity oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and

performance. NISSAN recommends the use of a

low friction oil (energy conserving oil) in order to

improve fuel economy and conserve energy. Oils

which do not have the specified quality label

should not be used as they could cause engine

damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new vehicle is equipped with a high-quality

genuine NISSAN oil filter. When replacing, use

the genuine oil filter or its equivalent for the

reason described in change intervals.

Only those engine oils with the American Petro-

leum Institute (API) certification mark on the front

NISSAN recommends mineral based oils. These

oils must however, meet the API quality and SAE

Technical and consumer information 9-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Change intervals

RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY

NUMBER

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

REFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT

RECOMMENDATIONS

The oil and oil filter change intervals for your

engine are based on the use of the specified

quality oils and filters. Oil and filter other than the

specified quality, or oil and filter change intervals

longer than recommended could reduce engine

life. Damage to engines caused by improper

maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter

quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the

new NISSAN vehicle warranties.

The air conditioning system in this NISSAN

vehicle must be charged with the refriger-

ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the lubricant,

Nissan A/C System Oil Type S or the exact

equivalents.

CAUTION

Your engine was filled with a high quality engine

oil when it was built. You do not have to change

the oil before the first recommended change

interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend

upon how you use your vehicle. Operation under

the following conditions may require more fre-

quent oil and filter changes.

The use of any other refrigerant or lubri-

cant will cause severe damage to the air

conditioning system and will require the

replacement of all air conditioner sys-

tem components.

repeated short distance driving at cold out-

side temperatures,

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your

NISSAN vehicle will not harm the earth’s ozone

layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect

the earth’s atmosphere, certain governmental

regulations require the recovery and recycling of

any refrigerant during automotive air condition-

ing system service. Your NISSAN dealer has the

trained technicians and equipment needed to

recover and recycle your air conditioning system

refrigerant.

driving in dusty conditions,

extensive idling,

towing a trailer,

TI1028-C

stop and go “rush hour” traffic,

aggressive driving.

SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all

ambient temperatures. SAE 10W-30,

10W-40 viscosity oil may be used if the

ambient temperature is above 0°F (−18°C).

9-6 Technical and consumer information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIFICATIONS

Contact your NISSAN dealer when servicing

your air conditioning system.

ENGINE

Model

VQ35DE

Gasoline, 4-cycle

Type

Cylinder arrangement

Bore x Stroke

6-cylinder, V-slanted at 60°

3.760 x 3.205 (95.5 x 81.4)

213.45 (3,498)

in (mm)

cu in (cm³)

Displacement

Firing order

1-2-3-4-5-6*

Idle speed

rpm

See the emission control label on

the underside of the hood.

Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.)

CO percentage at idle speed

degree/rpm

[No air] %

Standard

Service option

in (mm)

PLFR5A-11

Spark plug

PLFR4A-11, PLFR6A-11

0.043 (1.1)

Spark plug gap (Normal)

Camshaft operation

Timing chain

Technical and consumer information 9-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TI1009-A

The spark ignition system of this vehicle

meets all requirements of the Canadian

Interference-Causing Equipment Regula-

tions.

9-8 Technical and consumer information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHEELS AND TIRES

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Type

Road wheel

Size

Offset

in (mm)

Overall length

in (mm)

187.6 (4,767)

74.0 (1,880)

66.5 (1,689)

67.3 (1,709)

64.2 (1,630)

64.0 (1,625)

111.2 (2,825)

Aluminum

18 x 7-1/2JJ

P235/65R18 104T

1.38 (35)

Overall width

in (mm)

Conventional

Overall height without roof rack rail in (mm)

Tire

T165/90D18 107M

Conventional*

Overall height with roof rack rail

Front tread

in (mm)

lb(kg)

Spare

Conventional

33 PSI (230 kPa)

60 PSI (420 kPa)

Rear tread

Pressure (cold)

*: For Canada

Spare (T-type)

Wheelbase

Gross vehicle weight rating

Gross axle weight rating

Front

See the F.M.V.S.S. certifica-

tion label on the driver’s side

lock pillar.

lb(kg)

Rear

Technical and consumer information 9-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHENTRAVELING OR

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

REGISTERING YOUR VEHICLE IN

ANOTHER COUNTRY

When planning to travel in another country,

you should first find out if the fuel available is

suitable for your vehicle’s engine.

Using fuel with too low an octane rating may

cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles

must be operated with unleaded engine gaso-

line. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas

where appropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of your

vehicle to another country, state, province

or district, it may be necessary to modify the

vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-

sion control and safety standards vary according

to the country, state, province or district; there-

fore, vehicle specifications may differ.

STI0334

STI0374

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(VIN) PLATE

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(Chassis number)

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-

other country, state, province or district

and registered, its modifications, transpor-

tation, and registration are the responsibil-

ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsible

for any inconvenience that may result.

The vehicle identification number plate is at-

tached as shown. This number is the identifica-

tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle

registration.

The number is stamped under the passenger’s

seat as shown.

9-10 Technical and consumer information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STI0047

STI0336

STI0337

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

F.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABEL

EMISSION CONTROL

INFORMATION LABEL

The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

(F.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as

shown. This label contains valuable vehicle in-

formation, such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-

ings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR), month and year of manufacture, Ve-

hicle Identification Number, (VIN), etc. Review it

carefully.

The emission control information label is at-

tached as shown.

Technical and consumer information 9-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

STI0373

STI0339

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION

LABEL

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL

The cold tire pressure are shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label affixed to the driver’s

door center pillar.

The air conditioner specification label is affixed

inside of the hood as shown.

9-12 Technical and consumer information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE

PLATE

Use the following steps to mount the license

plate:

Before mounting the license plate, confirm that

the following parts are enclosed in the vinyl bag.

License plate bracket

Screw x 2

Bolt grommet x 2

Bolt x 2

1. Temporarily place the license plate bracket

while aligning points k of the front bumper

fascia with holes k in the license plate

bracket.

2. Remove the license plate bracket.

3. Carefully drill two pilot holes k using a 0.39

in (10 mm) drill bit at the marked locations.

(Be sure that the drill only goes through

the fascia, or damage to the nut may

occur.)

4. Insert grommets into the hole on the fascia.

5. Install the license plate bracket with bolts.

6. Install the license plate with screws k.

STI0340

Technical and consumer information 9-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

VEHICLE LOADING

INFORMATION

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) -

maximum total combined weight of the un-

loaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch,

trailer tongue load and any other optional

equipment. This information is located on the

F.M.V.S.S. label.

WARNING

It is extremely dangerous to ride in a

cargo area inside of a vehicle. In a

collision, people riding in these areas

are more likely to be seriously in-

jured or killed

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - maxi-

mum weight (load) limit specified for the front

or rear axle. This information is located on the

F.M.V.S.S. label.

Do not allow people to ride in any

area of your vehicle that is not

equipped with seats and seat belts.

GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) -

The maximum total weight rating of the ve-

hicle, passengers, cargo, and trailer.

Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in

a seat and using a seat belt properly.

Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit, Total

load capacity - maximum total weight limit

specified of the load (passengers and cargo)

for the vehicle. This is the maximum com-

bined weight of occupants and cargo that

can be loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is

used to tow a trailer, the trailer tongue weight

must be included as part of the cargo load.

This information is located on the Tire and

Loading Information label.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself with the

following terms before loading your vehicle:

CurbWeight (actual weight of your vehicle) -

vehicle weight including: standard and op-

tional equipment, fluids, emergency tools,

and spare tire assembly. This weight does

not include passengers and cargo.

Cargo capacity - permissible weight of cargo,

the subtracted weight of occupants from the

load limit.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curbweight

plus the combined weight of passengers and

cargo.

9-14 Technical and consumer information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

(4)The resulting figure equals the available

amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.

For example, if the “XXX” amount equals

1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.

passengers in your vehicle, the amount of

available cargo and luggage load capacity is

650 lbs. [1,400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.]

(5)Determine the combined weight of luggage

and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. For

safety, that weight must not exceed the avail-

able cargo and luggage load capacity calcu-

lated in Step 4.

(6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load

from your trailer will be transferred to your

vehicle. Consult this manual to determine

how this reduces the available cargo and

luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

STI0365

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Steps for determining correct load

limit

Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle

shown as “The combined weight of occupants

and cargo” on the Tire and Loading Information

label. Do not exceed the number of occupants

shown as “Seating Capacity” on the Tire and

Loading Information label.

(1)Locate the statement “The combined weight

of occupants and cargo should never exceed

XXX pounds or XXX kilograms” on your

vehicle’s placard.

(2)Determine the combined weight of the driver

and passengers that will be riding in your

vehicle.

To get “the combined weight of occupants and

cargo”, add the weight of all occupants, then

add the total luggage weight. Examples are

shown in the illustration.

(3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver

and passengers from XXX pounds or XXX

kilograms.

Technical and consumer information 9-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PAYLOAD WEIGHT CAPACITY

WARNING

The payload weight capacity is the maximum

total weight of passengers, optional equipment

(air conditioning, trailer hitch, etc.) and cargo

that your vehicle is designed to carry.

Properly secure all cargo to help pre-

vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the seat-

backs. In a sudden stop or collision,

unsecured cargo could cause per-

sonal injury.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you

do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR) for your vehicle. See “Vehicle loading

information” earlier in this section for details.

Do not load your vehicle any heavier

than the GVWR or the maximum front

and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts on

your vehicle can break, or it can

change the way your vehicle handles.

This could result in loss of control

and cause personal injury.

Also check tires for proper inflation pressures.

See the tire and loading information label affixed

to the driver’s door center pillar.

STI0343

Payload Weight Capacity Unit: lb(kg)

VQ35DE

LOADING TIPS

There are tie down hooks located in the cargo

area. The tie down hooks can be used to secure

cargo with ropes or other types of straps.

2WD

1,050 (475)

—

AWD

Overloading not only can shorten the

life of your vehicle and the tire, but

can also cause unsafe vehicle han-

dling and longer braking distances.

This may cause a premature tire fail-

ure which could result in a serious

accident and personal injury. Failures

caused by overloading are not cov-

ered by the vehicle’s warranty.

1,090 (495)

1,070 (485)

The GVW must not exceed GVWR or

GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S. certi-

fication label.

Canada

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that

could affect the balance of your vehicle. When

the vehicle is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh

the front and the rear wheels separately to

determine axle loads. Individual axle loads

should not exceed either of the gross axle weight

ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads

Do not load the front and rear axle to the

GAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR.

9-16 Technical and consumer information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TOWING A TRAILER

should not exceed the gross vehicle weight

rating (GVWR). These ratings are given on the

vehicle certification label that is located on the

driver’s door lock pillar. If weight ratings are

exceeded, move or remove items to bring all

weights below the ratings.

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from im-

proper towing procedures is not cov-

ered by NISSAN warranties. A NISSAN

Trailer Towing Guide (U.S. only) contain-

ing information on trailer towing ability

and the special equipment required may

be obtained from a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

Overloading can shorten the life of your

vehicle. Failures caused by overloading

are not covered by your warranty.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS

Maximum trailer loads

CA0009

Your new vehicle was designed to be used

primarily to carry passengers and cargo. Re-

member that towing a trailer will place additional

loads on your vehicle’s engine, drive train, steer-

ing, braking and other systems.

Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the

value specified in the Towing Load/Specification

Chart found later in this section. The total trailer

load equals trailer weight plus its cargo weight.

When towing a trailer load of 1,000 lbs. (454

kg) or more, trailers with a brake system

MUST be used.

A Nissan Trailer Towing Guide (US only) is

available from a NISSAN dealer. This guide

includes information on trailer towing ability and

the special equipment required for proper tow-

ing.

The maximum GCWR (Gross Combined Weight

Rating) should not exceed the value specified in

the following Towing Load/Specification Chart.

The GCWR equals the combined weight of the

towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo)

plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greater

Technical and consumer information 9-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

than these or using improper towing equipment

could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking

and performance.

Also, when the high temperature mode

operates, vehicle speed may be gradu-

ally reduced. On highways, the reduced

speed may be lower than other traffic

which could increase the chance of a

collision. Be especially careful when

driving. If necessary, pull to the side of

the road at a safe place and allow the

engine to cool or the transmission to

return to normal operation.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not

only related to the maximum trailer loads, but

also the places you plan to tow. Tow weights

appropriate for level highway driving may have to

be reduced on very steep grades or in low

traction situations (for example, on slippery boat

ramps).

Temperature conditions also can affect towing.

For example, towing a heavy trailer in high

outside temperatures on graded roads can af-

fect engine performance and cause overheating.

The transmission high fluid temperature protec-

tion mode, which helps reduce the chance of

transmission damage, could activate and auto-

matically decrease engine power. Vehicle speed

may decrease to 40 to 50 MPH (65 to 80 km/h)

under high load. Plan your trip carefully to ac-

count for trailer and vehicle load, weather, and

road conditions.

Tongue load

TI1012M

Keep the tongue load between 9 to 11% of the

total trailer load within the maximum tongue load

limits shown in the following Towing

Load/Specifications Chart. If the tongue load

becomes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for

proper tongue load.

Maximum gross vehicle weight/

maximum gross axle weight

The gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle

must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating

(GVWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S. certification

label. The gross vehicle weight equals the com-

bined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passen-

gers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any

other optional equipment. In addition, front or

rear gross axle weight must not exceed the

gross axle weight rating (GAWR) shown on the

F.M.V.S.S. certification label.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced en-

gine power and lower vehicle speed.

9-18 Technical and consumer information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART

TOWING SAFETY

Trailer hitch

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART

Unit: lb(kg)

Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and

trailer. A genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is avail-

able from your NISSAN dealer. Make sure the

trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle, to

help avoid personal injury or property damage

due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough road

surfaces or passing trucks.

VQ35DE

CVT

MODEL

WEIGHT

MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT*1

MAXIMUM TONGUE LOAD

3,500 (1,588)

350 (159)

GROSS COMBINED WEIGHT RATING

RECOMMENDED EQUIPMENT*2

8,100 (3,674)

Sway Control Device (SCD)

CAUTION

*1: All towing above 1,000 lb (454 kg) requires the use of trailer brakes. NISSAN recommends the use of

a tandem axle trailer whenever towing above 3,000 lb (1,361 kg).

Special hitches which include frame

reinforcements are required for tow-

ing above 2,000 lb (907 kg). Suitable

Genuine NISSAN hitches for pickup

truck and sport utility vehicles are

available at a NISSAN dealer.

*2: A sway control device is recommended for all towing above 2,000 lb (907 kg). Sway control devices

are not offered by NISSAN. See a professional trailer/hitch outlet for a properly designed sway control

device for your trailer.

Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

The hitch should not be attached to

or affect the operation of the impact

absorbing bumper.

Do not modify the vehicle exhaust

system, brake system, etc. to install a

trailer hitch.

Technical and consumer information 9-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it

has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down con-

dition; check for improper tongue load, over-

load, worn suspension or other possible

causes of either condition.

Safety chain

After the hitch is removed, seal the

bolt holes to prevent exhaust fumes,

water or dust from entering the pas-

senger compartment.

Always use a suitable chains between your

vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should

be crossed and should be attached to the hitch,

not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to

leave enough slack in the chain to permit turning

corners.

Always secure items in the trailer to prevent

load shifts while driving.

Regularly check all hitch mounting

bolts are securely mounted.

Be certain your rear view mirrors conform to

all federal, state or local regulations. If not,

install any mirrors required for towing before

driving the vehicle.

To reduce the possibility of addi-

tional damage if your vehicle is

struck from the rear, where practical,

remove the hitch and/or receiver

when not in use.

Trailer lights

Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or

local regulations. When wiring the vehicle for

towing, connect the stop and tail light pickup

into the vehicle electrical circuit.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding of the

vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,

stopping and backing up in an area which is free

from traffic. Steering stability, and braking per-

formance will be somewhat different than under

normal driving conditions.

Trailer brakes

Tire pressures

If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,

make sure it conforms to federal and/or local

regulations and that it is properly installed.

When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle tires

to the recommended cold tire pressure indi-

cated on the Tire and Loading Information

label (located on the driver’s door center

pillar).

Always secure items in the trailer to prevent

load shift while driving.

WARNING

Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and

proper inflation pressure should be in accor-

dance with the trailer and tire manufacturers’

specifications.

Never connect a trailer brake system

directly to the vehicle brake system.

Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.

Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

Always drive your vehicle at a moderate

speed.

Pre-towing tips

Be certain your vehicle maintains a level

position when a loaded and/or unloaded

Always block the wheels on both vehicle and

trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not

9-20 Technical and consumer information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

recommended; however, if you must do so,

first block the wheels and apply the parking

brake, and then move the selector lever into

the P (Park) position. If you move the selector

lever to the P (Park) position before blocking

the wheels and applying the parking brake,

transmission damage could occur.

Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles

(800 km).

to overheat, resulting in reduced braking ef-

ficiency.

Have your vehicle serviced more often than at

intervals specified in the recommended main-

tenance schedule.

When making a turn, your trailer wheels will

be closer to the inside of the turn than your

vehicle wheels. To compensate for this, make

a larger than normal turning radius during the

turn.

When going down a hill, shift into a lower

gear and use the engine braking effect.

When going up a long grade, downshift the

transmission to a lower gear and reduce

speed to reduce chances of engine overload-

ing and/or overheating.

Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely

affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-

ing vehicle sway. When being passed by

larger vehicles, be prepared for possible

changes in crosswinds that could affect ve-

hicle handling. If swaying does occur, firmly

grip the steering wheel, steer straight ahead,

and immediately (but gradually) reduce ve-

hicle speed. This combination will help stabi-

lize the vehicle. Never increase speed.

If the engine coolant rises to an extremely

high temperature when the air conditioning

system is on, turn off the air conditioner.

Coolant heat can be additionally vented by

opening the windows, switching the fan con-

trol to high and setting the temperature con-

trol to the HOT position.

If the transmission fluid rises to an extremely

high temperature, a high fluid temperature

protection mode may operate. See page

5-13 for details. If necessary, pull to the side

of the road at a safe place and let the

transmission cool before continuing.

Be careful when passing other vehicles.

Passing while towing a trailer requires con-

siderably more distance than normal passing.

Remember the length of the trailer must also

pass the other vehicle before you can safely

change lanes.

Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal

circumstances.

Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long

or too frequently. This could cause the brakes

Technical and consumer information 9-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY

GRADING

DOT (Department Of Transportation) Quality

Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to

federal safety requirements in addition to these

grades.

crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction

performance.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that is properly

inflated and not overloaded. Excessive

speed, underinflation, or excessive

loading, either separately or in combi-

nation, can cause heat buildup and pos-

sible tire failure.

Quality grades can be found where applicable

on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and

maximum section width. For example:

The traction grade assigned to your ve-

hicle tires is based on straight-ahead

braking traction tests, and does not in-

clude acceleration, cornering, hydro-

planing, or peak traction characteristics.

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based

on tire wear rate when tested under controlled

conditions on specified government test

courses. For example, a tire graded 150 would

wear one and a half (1-1/2) times as well on the

government course as a tire graded 100. How-

ever, relative tire performance depends on actual

driving conditions, and may vary significantly

from the norm due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in road char-

acteristics and climate.

Temperature A, B and C

Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and

C. They represent a tire’s resistance to heat

build-up, and its ability to dissipate heat when

tested under controlled conditions on a speci-

fied indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high

temperature can cause tire material to degener-

ate, reducing tire life. Excessive temperatures

can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C corre-

sponds to a performance level which all passen-

ger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades A and

B represent higher levels of performance on

laboratory test wheels than the minimum re-

quired by law.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are

AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the

tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-

sured under controlled conditions on specified

government test surfaces of asphalt and con-

9-22 Technical and consumer information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/

MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (US

only)

EMISSIONCONTROL SYSTEM

WARRANTY

Your NISSAN is covered by the following emis-

sion warranties.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

(US only)

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect

which could cause a crash or could cause

injury or death, you should immediately inform

the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-

WARNING

For US:

vehicle equipped with AWD (All-

Emission Defects Warranty

tration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying

Wheel Drive) should never be tested

using a two wheel dynamometer, similar

to the dynamometers used by some

states for emissions testing, or similar

equipment. Make sure you inform the

test facility personnel that your vehicle

is an AWD equipped vehicle before it is

placed on a dynamometer. Failure to do

so may result in transmission damage

or unexpected vehicle movement which

could result in serious vehicle damage

or personal injury.

NISSAN.

Emissions Performance Warranty

(See Warranty Information Booklet for de-

tails)

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may

open an investigation, and if it finds that a

safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it

may order a recall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannot become involved

in individual problems between you, your

dealer, or NISSAN.

For Canada:

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found with

other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet that comes with your NISSAN

vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet or it has become lost, you may

obtain a replacement by writing to:

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Auto

Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236.

You may also write to: NHTSA, U.S. Depart-

ment of Transportation, Washington, D.C.

20590. You can also obtain other information

about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 191

Due to legal requirements in some states/

areas, your vehicle may be required to be in what

is called the “ready condition” for an

Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emis-

sion control system.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Con-

sumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at 1-800-

662-6200.

Gardena, CA. 90248-0191

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario,

L4W 4Z5

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when

it is driven through certain driving patterns.

Usually, the “ready condition” can be obtained

by ordinary usage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired or

Technical and consumer information 9-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EVENT DATA RECORDERS

the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be

reset to a not “ready condition”. Before taking

the I/M test, drive the vehicle through the follow-

ing pattern to set the vehicle to the ready

condition. If you cannot or do not want to

perform the driving pattern, a NISSAN dealer

can conduct it for you.

5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h)

and maintain the speed for 20 seconds.

Your vehicle is equipped with a variety of com-

puters that monitor and control a number of

systems to optimize performance and help ser-

vice technicians with diagnosis and repair. De-

pending on the equipment on your vehicle, some

of the computers monitor emission control sys-

tems, braking systems and air bag systems, just

to name a few. Some data about vehicle opera-

tion may be stored in the computers for use

during servicing. Other data may be stored if a

crash event occurs. For example, air bag readi-

ness, air bag performance, and seat belt use by

the driver or passenger may be recorded, de-

pending on vehicle equipment. These types of

systems are sometimes called Event Data Re-

corders.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least 3 times.

7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h)

and maintain the speed for at least 3 minutes.

8. Stop the vehicle. Place the transmission se-

lector lever in the “P” or “N” position.

WARNING

9. Turn the engine off.

10.Repeat steps 1 through 8 at least one more

time.

Always drive the vehicle in a safe and

prudent manner according to traffic

conditions, and obey all traffic laws.

If step 1 through 7 is interrupted, repeat the

preceding step. Any safe driving mode is ac-

ceptable between steps. Do not stop the engine

until step 7 is completed.

1. Start the engine. Allow the engine to idle until

the engine coolant temperature gauge needle

points between the C and H (normal operat-

ing temperature).

Special equipment can be used to access the

electronic data that may be stored in the vehi-

cle’s computers (sounds are not recorded).

NISSAN and NISSAN dealers have equipment

to access some of this data; others may also

have this equipment. The data may be retrieved

during routine vehicle servicing or for special

research. It might also be accessed with the

consent of the vehicle owner or lessee, in re-

sponse to a request by law enforcement, or as

otherwise required or permitted by law.

2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h),

then quickly release the accelerator pedal

completely and keep it released for at least 6

seconds.

3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for a

moment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of

53 to 60 MPH (86 to 96 km/h) for at least 5

minutes.

4. Stop the vehicle. Leave the engine running.

9-24 Technical and consumer information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE

MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

For current pricing and availability of genuine

NISSAN Owner’s Manuals for the 2002

model year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or

contact:

DDS Distribution Services, Ltd.

20770 Westwood Dr.

Strongsville OH 44136

1-800-247-5321

In Canada:

To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN

Service Manual or Owner’s Manual please con-

tact your nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone

number and location of a NISSAN Dealer in your

area call the NISSAN Satisfaction Center at

1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN rep-

resentative will assist you.

A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best

source of service and repair information for your

vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations

and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment

procedures, this manual is the same one used by

the factory trained technicians working at autho-

rized NISSAN dealerships. Also available are

genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, and genu-

ine NISSAN Service and Owner’s Manuals for

older NISSAN models.

In the USA:

For current pricing and availability of genuine

NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model

year and later, contact:

Also available are Genuine NISSAN Service and

Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

Tweddle Litho Company

1-800-639-8841

www.nissan-techinfo.com

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION

For current pricing and availability of genuine

NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model

year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikely

event, there is some important information you

should know. Many insurance companies rou-

tinely authorize the use of non-genuine collision

parts in order to cut costs, among other reasons.

DDS Distribution Services, Ltd.

20770 Westwood Dr.

Strongsville OH 44136

1-800-247-5321

Technical and consumer information 9-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

laws that restrict insurance companies from

authorizing the use of non-genuine collision

parts during the new vehicle warranty. These

laws help protect you, so you can take action to

protect yourself.

Insist on the use of Genuine Nissan

Collision Parts!

If you want your vehicle to be restored using

parts made to Nissan’s original exacting speci-

fications — if you want to help it to last and hold

its resale value, the solution is simple. Tell your

insurance agent and your repair shop to

only use Genuine Nissan Collision Parts.

Nissan does not warrant non-Nissan parts, nor

does Nissan’s warranty apply to damage caused

by a non-genuine part.

It’s your right!

If you should need further information visit us at:

www.nissanusa.com.

Using Genuine Nissan Parts can help protect

your personal safety, preserve your warranty

protection and maintain the resale value of your

vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using

Genuine Nissan Parts may prevent or limit un-

necessary excess wear and tear expenses at the

end of your lease.

Nissan designs its hoods with crumple zones to

minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate the

windshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non-

genuine (imitation) parts may not provide such

built in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts of-

ten show premature wear, rust and corrosion.

Why should you take a chance?

In over 40 states, the law says you must be

advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair

your vehicle. And some states have enacted

9-26 Technical and consumer information

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10 Index

Audio operation precautions .................................. 4-21

Audio system.............................................................. 4-20

Autochanger, Compact Disc (CD) ....................... 4-30

Autolight system........................................................ 2-21

Automatic

Anti-glare inside mirror...................................... 3-15

Automatic sunroof .............................................. 2-35

Drive positioner ................................................... 3-16

Seat positioner, seat.......................................... 3-16

Avoiding collision and rollover.................................. 5-5

AWD (all wheel drive) warning light .................... 2-10

Parking brake operation.................................... 5-18

Warning light ....................................................... 2-10

Break-in schedule ..................................................... 5-21

Brightness control, Instrument panel ................... 2-24

Bulbcheck/instrument panel.................................... 2-9

Bulbreplacement...................................................... 8-24

ABS (Anti-lock brake system)................................ 5-28

Aiming control, Headlights...................................... 2-23

Air bag warning labels............................................. 1-20

Air bag warning light .................................... 1-20, 2-12

Air cleaner housing filter.......................................... 8-16

Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation .................................. 4-16

Cabin air filter............................................................. 4-19

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants...... 9-2

Car phone or CB radio............................................ 4-33

Cargo (See vehicle loading information)............. 2-32

Cargo net .................................................................... 2-32

Cassette player (See audio system).................... 4-28

Catalytic converter, Three way catalyst ................. 5-3

CD care and cleaning.............................................. 4-31

Ceiling light................................................................. 2-37

Cellular phone holder............................................... 2-29

Child restraints........................................................... 1-32

Installation on front passenger seat............... 1-42

Installation on rear seat center or outboard

positions................................................................ 1-34

Precautions on child restraints........................ 1-32

Top tether strap anchor point locations ....... 1-41

With top tether strap......................................... 1-40

Child safety................................................................. 1-24

Child safety rear door lock........................................ 3-4

Air conditioner service........................... 4-16, 4-20

Air conditioner specification label .................. 9-12

Air conditioning system refrigerant and lubricant

recommendations ...................................... 4-20, 9-6

Heater and air conditioner (automatic)......... 4-16

In-cabin microfilter.............................................. 4-19

Alcohol, drugs and driving......................................... 5-5

All wheel drive (AWD) ............................................. 5-22

All wheel drive (AWD), AWD lock switch

Back door ...................................................................... 3-9

Battery.......................................................................... 8-14

Battery saver system ......................................... 2-22

Battery replacement

Remote keyless entry system............................. 3-8

Before starting the engine......................................... 5-9

Belts (See drive belts)............................................. 8-15

Brake

operations.................................................................... 5-23

Anchor point locations

Top tether strap .................................................. 1-41

Antenna........................................................................ 4-33

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS).............................. 5-28

Anti-lock brake warning light.................................... 2-9

Appearance care

Exterior appearance care .................................... 7-2

Interior appearance care ..................................... 7-3

Armrest........................................................................... 1-9

Audible reminders ..................................................... 2-15

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)......................... 5-28

Brake booster...................................................... 8-20

Brake fluid............................................................. 8-12

Brake pedal.......................................................... 8-19

Brake pedal check ............................................. 8-20

Brake system ....................................................... 5-27

Parking brake check............................... 5-18, 8-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chimes

Audible reminders............................................... 2-15

Seat belt warning light and chime ................. 2-11

Circuit breaker, Fusible link .................................... 8-21

Cleaning exterior and interior .......................... 7-2, 7-3

Clock (models with navigation system)............... 4-14

Clock (models without navigation

system) ........................................................................... 4-4

Coin box ...................................................................... 2-28

Cold weather driving................................................ 5-30

Compact Disc (CD) changer operation.............. 4-30

Compact Disc (CD) player (See audio

system)......................................................................... 4-29

Compass display ......................................................... 2-6

Console box................................................................ 2-31

Control panel buttons (models with navigation

system) ........................................................................... 4-7

Control panel buttons (models without navigation

system) ........................................................................... 4-2

Controls

CVT fluid...................................................................... 8-12

CVT, Driving with CVT (Continuously Variable

Transmission) ............................................................. 5-10

CVT, Transmission selector lever lock

Engine

Before starting the engine.................................. 5-9

Break-in schedule............................................... 5-21

Capacities and recommended fuel/

release.............................................................. 5-13, 5-17

lubricants................................................................. 9-2

Changing engine coolant.................................... 8-9

Changing engine oil........................................... 8-10

Changing engine oil filter ................................. 8-11

Checking engine coolant level........................... 8-8

Checking engine oil level.................................... 8-9

Coolant temperature gauge ............................... 2-5

Engine block heater........................................... 5-32

Engine compartment check locations.............. 8-7

Engine cooling system......................................... 8-8

Engine oil................................................................. 8-9

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation......... 9-5

Engine oil viscosity ............................................... 9-5

Engine serial number......................................... 9-11

Engine specifications ........................................... 9-7

If your vehicle overheats ................................... 6-10

Starting the engine............................................. 5-10

Event data recorders................................................ 9-24

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide).............................. 5-2

Exterior light replacement........................................ 8-26

Daytime running light system................................. 2-23

Defroster switch, Rear window and outside mirror

defroster switch......................................................... 2-19

Dimensions and weights............................................ 9-9

Display controls (See control panel buttons), With

navigation system ........................................................ 4-7

Display controls (See control panel buttons),

Without navigation system ........................................ 4-2

Door open warning light.......................................... 2-11

Drive belts................................................................... 8-15

Drive positioner, Automatic..................................... 3-16

Pedal position adjustment................................ 3-13

Driving

Control panel buttons (display with navigation

system)..................................................................... 4-7

Control panel buttons (display without navigation

system)..................................................................... 4-2

Heater and air conditioner controls

All wheel drive (AWD)....................................... 5-22

Cold weather driving ......................................... 5-30

Driving with CVT (Continuously Variable

Transmission)....................................................... 5-10

On-pavement and offroad driving..................... 5-5

Precautions when starting and driving ............ 5-2

Safety precautions................................................ 5-6

(automatic)............................................................ 4-16

Coolant

Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants................................................................. 9-2

Changing engine coolant.................................... 8-9

Checking engine coolant level........................... 8-8

Corrosion protection................................................... 7-5

Cover, Tonneau cover.............................................. 2-32

Cruise control............................................................. 5-19

Cup holders................................................................ 2-29

F.M.V.S.S. certification label................................... 9-11

Filter

Air cleaner housing filter................................... 8-16

Changing engine oil filter ................................. 8-11

Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch)... 2-25

Flat tire............................................................................ 6-2

Flat tire, Low tire pressure warning system.......... 5-3

Economy, Fuel............................................................ 5-21

Emission control information label........................ 9-11

Emission control system warranty......................... 9-23

10-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Floor mat cleaning....................................................... 7-4

Fluid

Odometer................................................................ 2-4

Speedometer.......................................................... 2-4

Tachometer............................................................. 2-4

General maintenance.................................................. 8-2

Glove box.................................................................... 2-30

Glove box lock........................................................... 2-30

Mirror...................................................................... 3-14

Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test ........................ 9-23

Instrument brightness control ................................ 2-24

Instrument panel........................................................... 2-2

Interior light replacement......................................... 8-26

Interior lights............................................................... 2-37

Ceiling light .......................................................... 2-37

Luggage light....................................................... 2-37

Map light............................................................... 2-37

Rear light............................................................... 2-37

ISOFIX child restraint............................................... 1-39

Brake fluid............................................................. 8-12

Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants................................................................. 9-2

CVT fluid............................................................... 8-12

Engine coolant....................................................... 8-8

Engine oil................................................................. 8-9

Power steering fluid........................................... 8-12

Window washer fluid......................................... 8-13

Fog light switch ......................................................... 2-24

Front power point...................................................... 2-27

Front power seat adjustment.................................... 1-3

Front seat adjustment................................................. 1-2

Fuel

Hazard warning flasher switch............................... 2-25

Head restraints............................................................. 1-7

Headlights

Aiming control ..................................................... 2-23

Bulbreplacement ............................................... 8-24

Headlight switch................................................. 2-20

Xenon headlights................................................ 2-20

Heated seats.............................................................. 2-26

Heater

Engine coolant heater ....................................... 5-32

Heater and air conditioner (automatic)......... 4-16

HomeLink Universal Transceiver......................... 2-39

Hood release ................................................................ 3-9

Horn.............................................................................. 2-25

Jump starting................................................................. 6-8

Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants................................................................. 9-2

filler cap................................................................. 3-11

filler lid ................................................................... 3-11

Fuel economy ...................................................... 5-21

Fuel octane rating ................................................. 9-3

Fuel recommendation........................................... 9-3

Gauge ...................................................................... 2-5

Fuses............................................................................ 8-21

Fusible links ................................................................ 8-21

Keyless entry (See remote keyless entry

system) ........................................................................... 3-5

Keys................................................................................. 3-2

Label, Air conditioner specification label ............ 9-12

Label, Emission control information label............ 9-11

Label, F.M.V.S.S. certification label...................... 9-11

Labels

Air bag warning labels ...................................... 1-20

Engine serial number......................................... 9-11

Vehicle identification number (VIN)................ 9-10

LATCH system........................................................... 1-39

License plate, Installing front license plate......... 9-13

Ignition switch............................................................... 5-8

Key positions.......................................................... 5-8

Immobilizer system.................................................... 2-17

In-cabin microfilter .................................................... 4-19

Indicator lights............................................................ 2-13

Inside

Garage door opener, HomeLink Universal

Transceiver.................................................................. 2-39

Gas cap....................................................................... 3-11

Gauge............................................................................. 2-3

Engine coolant temperature gauge .................. 2-5

Fuel gauge.............................................................. 2-5

Automatic anti-glare mirror............................... 3-15

10-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Light

Air bag warning light ......................................... 1-20

Outside the vehicle............................................... 8-2

Seat belt maintenance ...................................... 1-32

Under the hood and vehicle............................... 8-4

Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)........................... 2-14

Map light...................................................................... 2-37

Meters and gauges ..................................................... 2-3

Meters and gauges, Instrument brightness

Outside mirrors.......................................................... 3-15

Overheat, If your vehicle overheats ...................... 6-10

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order

Bulbreplacement ............................................... 8-24

information................................................................... 9-25

Fog light switch................................................... 2-24

Headlight switch................................................. 2-20

Headlights Bulbreplacement.......................... 8-24

Interior lights ........................................................ 2-37

Replacement........................................................ 8-24

Vanity mirror light................................................ 2-39

Warning/indicator lights and audible

control .......................................................................... 2-24

Mirror

Parking

Brake check......................................................... 8-19

Parking brake check .......................................... 5-18

Parking brake operation.................................... 5-18

Parking/parking on hills ........................................... 5-26

Pedal position adjustment....................................... 3-13

Phone, Car phone or CB radio ............................. 4-33

Power

Front seat adjustment .......................................... 1-3

Power door lock.................................................... 3-3

Power outlet......................................................... 2-27

Power steering fluid........................................... 8-12

Power steering system...................................... 5-27

Power windows................................................... 2-33

Pre-tensioner seat belt system.............................. 1-19

Precautions

Audio operation................................................... 4-21

Braking precautions........................................... 5-27

Child restraints.................................................... 1-32

Cruise control...................................................... 5-19

Driving safety.......................................................... 5-6

Maintenance ........................................................... 8-5

On-pavement and offroad driving..................... 5-5

Seat belt usage................................................... 1-22

Supplemental restraint system........................... 1-9

When starting and driving .................................. 5-2

Push starting .............................................................. 6-10

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror .................. 3-15

Inside mirror ......................................................... 3-14

Outside mirror control ....................................... 3-15

Outside mirrors ................................................... 3-15

M-CVT (CVT with Manual shift mode)................ 5-14

reminders..................................................... 2-9, 2-13

Xenon headlights................................................ 2-20

Lights, Exterior and interior light replacement ... 8-24

Loading information (See vehicle loading

information) ................................................................. 9-14

Lock

Back door lock....................................................... 3-9

Door locks............................................................... 3-3

Glove box lock..................................................... 2-30

Power door lock.................................................... 3-3

Lockout protection....................................................... 3-4

Low fuel warning light.............................................. 2-11

Low tire pressure warning light............................. 2-12

Low tire pressure warning system ................. 5-3, 6-2

Luggage light ............................................................. 2-37

Net, Cargo net........................................................... 2-32

New vehicle break-in................................................ 5-21

Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System...................... 2-16

Engine start............................................................. 5-9

Odometer....................................................................... 2-4

Oil

Capacities and recommended fuel/

Maintenance

lubricants................................................................. 9-2

Changing engine oil........................................... 8-10

Checking engine oil level.................................... 8-9

Engine oil................................................................. 8-9

Engine oil viscosity ............................................... 9-5

Outside mirror control.............................................. 3-15

Battery ................................................................... 8-14

General maintenance ........................................... 8-2

Inside the vehicle................................................... 8-3

Maintenance precautions.................................... 8-5

Maintenance requirements.................................. 8-2

10-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Seat belt(s)

Child safety .......................................................... 1-24

Starting

Before starting the engine.................................. 5-9

Infants and small children................................. 1-24

Injured persons.................................................... 1-25

Larger children .................................................... 1-24

Pre-tensioner seat belt system ....................... 1-19

Precautions on seat belt usage...................... 1-22

Pregnant women................................................. 1-25

Rear center seat belt......................................... 1-29

Seat belt cleaning................................................. 7-4

Seat belt extenders............................................ 1-31

Seat belt hook..................................................... 1-28

Seat belt maintenance ...................................... 1-32

Seat belts ............................................................. 1-22

Shoulder belt height adjustment..................... 1-28

Three-point type with retractor ....................... 1-25

Jump starting.......................................................... 6-8

Precautions when starting and driving ............ 5-2

Push starting........................................................ 6-10

Starting the engine............................................. 5-10

Radio, Car phone or CB radio .............................. 4-33

Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test (US

only) .............................................................................. 9-23

Rear center seat belt................................................ 1-29

Rear door lock, Child safety rear door lock.......... 3-4

Rear light..................................................................... 2-37

Rear power point....................................................... 2-27

Rear seat adjustment.................................................. 1-5

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch........................................................................... 2-19

Rear window wiper and washer switch .............. 2-19

Recorders, Event data ............................................. 9-24

Registering your vehicle in another country....... 9-10

Remote keyless entry system ................................... 3-5

Reporting safety defects (US only)...................... 9-23

Steering

Power steering fluid........................................... 8-12

Power steering system...................................... 5-27

Tilting steering wheel......................................... 3-13

Steering switch for audio control.......................... 4-32

Storage ........................................................................ 2-28

Sun shade................................................................... 2-36

Sun visors ................................................................... 3-14

Sunroof ........................................................................ 2-35

Automatic sunroof .............................................. 2-35

Supplemental air bag warning labels................... 1-20

Supplemental air bag warning light.......... 1-20, 2-12

Supplemental restraint system ................................. 1-9

Precautions on supplemental restraint

Seat(s)

Driver-side memory............................................ 3-16

Heated seats........................................................ 2-26

Seats ........................................................................ 1-2

Security system, Vehicle security system ........... 2-16

Security systems (Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer

system...................................................................... 1-9

Switch

Safety

Child seat belts................................................... 1-24

Reporting safety defects (US only)................ 9-23

Towing safety....................................................... 9-19

Safety chain................................................................ 9-20

Seat

Belt warning light................................................ 1-22

Belt warning light and chime........................... 2-11

Seat adjustment

System), Engine start............................................... 2-17

Security systems (See vehicle security

Autolight switch .................................................. 2-21

AWD lock switch operations........................... 5-23

Fog light switch................................................... 2-24

Hazard warning flasher switch........................ 2-25

Headlight aiming control................................... 2-23

Headlight switch................................................. 2-20

Ignition switch........................................................ 5-8

Power door lock switch....................................... 3-4

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

system)......................................................................... 2-16

Servicing air conditioner.............................. 4-16, 4-20

Shift lock release........................................... 5-13, 5-17

Shifting, CVT (Continuously Variable

Transmission) ............................................................. 5-10

Shoulder belt height adjustment ........................... 1-28

Spare tire..................................................................... 8-35

Spark plugs................................................................. 8-16

Speedometer ................................................................ 2-4

Front power seat adjustment ............................. 1-3

Front seat adjustment .......................................... 1-2

Rear seat adjustment ........................................... 1-5

switch..................................................................... 2-19

Turn signal switch .............................................. 2-24

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch... 2-27

10-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Transmission

Driving with CVT (Continuously Variable

Transmission)....................................................... 5-10

Transmission selector lever lock

Tachometer.................................................................... 2-4

Temperature gauge, Engine coolant temperature

gauge.............................................................................. 2-5

Three way catalyst....................................................... 5-3

Tilting steering wheel ............................................... 3-13

Tire

Flat tire..................................................................... 6-2

Low tire pressure warning system........... 5-3, 6-2

Pressure, Low tire pressure warning light ... 2-12

Safety chain ......................................................... 9-20

Spare tire.............................................................. 8-35

Tire and loading information label.................. 9-12

Uniform tire quality grading.............................. 9-22

Tire and loading information label......................... 9-12

Tires

Tire chains............................................................ 8-32

Tire pressure........................................................ 8-27

Tire rotation.......................................................... 8-33

Types of tires....................................................... 8-31

Wheel/tire size....................................................... 9-9

Wheels and tires ................................................ 8-27

Tonneau cover ........................................................... 2-32

Top tether strap child restraints............................ 1-40

Towing

Tow truck towing................................................ 6-11

Towing a trailer.................................................... 9-17

Towing load/specification chart...................... 9-17

Towing safety....................................................... 9-19

Trailer towing.............................................................. 9-17

Transceiver, HomeLink Universal

Warning labels, Air bag warning labels .............. 1-20

Warning light

release ....................................................... 5-13, 5-17

Transmitter (See remote keyless entry system)... 3-5

Traveling or registering your vehicle in another

country ......................................................................... 9-10

Turn signal switch..................................................... 2-24

Air bag warning light.............................. 1-20, 2-12

Anti-lock brake warning light ............................. 2-9

AWD (all wheel drive) warning light.............. 2-10

AWD warning light............................................. 5-24

Brake warning light ............................................ 2-10

Door open warning light................................... 2-11

Low fuel warning light ....................................... 2-11

Low tire pressure warning light ...................... 2-12

Seat belt warning light and chime ................. 2-11

Warning lights .............................................................. 2-9

Warning, Hazard warning flasher switch ............ 2-25

Warning, Low tire pressure warning

system.................................................................... 5-3, 6-2

Warning, Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders ....................................................................... 2-9

Warranty, Emission control system warranty..... 9-23

Washer switch

Rear window wiper and washer switch........ 2-19

Windshield wiper and washer switch ........... 2-18

Washing......................................................................... 7-2

Waxing............................................................................ 7-2

Weights (See dimensions and weights) ............... 9-9

Wheel/tire size.............................................................. 9-9

Wheels and tires....................................................... 8-27

Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels ....................... 7-3

Window washer fluid ............................................... 8-13

Window(s)

Underbody cleaning.................................................... 7-3

Uniform tire quality grading .................................... 9-22

Vanity mirror light ...................................................... 2-39

Vehicle

Dimensions and weights..................................... 9-9

Identification number (VIN)............................... 9-10

Loading information............................................ 9-14

Recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle)................. 6-14

Security system................................................... 2-16

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch... 2-27

Vehicle electronic systems............................... 4-12

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system

(if so equipped) ......................................................... 5-29

Vehicle load capacity ............................................... 9-15

Ventilators.................................................................... 4-16

Cleaning................................................................... 7-3

Power windows................................................... 2-33

Windshield wiper and washer switch.................. 2-18

Transceiver.................................................................. 2-39

10-6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Wiper

Rear window wiper and washer switch........ 2-19

Rear window wiper blade................................. 8-19

Windshield wiper and washer switch ........... 2-18

Wiper blades ....................................................... 8-17

Xenon headlights....................................................... 2-20

10-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MEMO

10-8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GAS STATIONINFORMATION

FUEL RECOMMENDATION:

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-

tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock

Index) number (Research octane number

91).

API Certification Mark

API grade SG/SH, Energy Conserving I & II

or API grade SJ or SL, Energy Conserving

ILSAC grade GF-I, GF-II & GF-III

For

improved

vehicle

performance,

NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded

premium gasoline with an octane rating of

at least 91 AKI number (Research octane

number 96).

SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all

ambient temperatures. SAE 10W-30,

10W-40 viscosity oil may be used for ambi-

ent temperatures above 0°F (−18°C).

See “Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants” in the “9. Technical and consumer

information” section for engine oil and oil filter

recommendation.

CAUTION

Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission con-

trol systems, and may also affect war-

ranty coverage.

COLD TIRE PRESSURES:

See Tire and Loading Information label affixed to

the inside of the driver side center pillar.

Under no circumstances should

leaded gasoline be used, since this will

damage the three way catalyst.

NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN

PROCEDURES

RECOMMENDATION:

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of ve-

hicle use, follow the recommendations outlined

in the “Break-in schedule” Information found in

the “5. Starting and driving” section of this

Owner’s Manual.

For additional information, see “Capacities and

recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Techni-

cal and consumer information” section.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

QUICK REFERENCE

1. Battery (P.8-14)

2. Brake fluid (P.8-12)

3. Meters and gauges (P.2-3)

4. Hood release (P.3-9)

5. Seat (P.1-2)

6. Seat belt (P.1-22)

7. Door lock/key (P.3-3)

8. Fuel (P.3-11, P.9-2)

9. Engine oil (P.8-9)

10. Windshield washer fluid (P.8-13)

11. Engine coolant (P.8-8)

12. Power steering fluid (P.8-12)

13. Audio system (P.4-20)/

Heater and air conditioner (P.4-16)

14. Spare tire (P.6-4, P.8-35)

STI0344

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Miele Refrigerator B999790 User Manual
Miller Camera Support Camcorder Accessories TRIPOD SERIES User Manual
MTD Lawn Mower 111 150 User Manual
Nextar MP3 Player MA968 User Manual
Night Owl Optics DVR Advantage Series User Manual
NordicTrack Treadmill 307030 User Manual
NuTone Bathroom Aids 8663RLG User Manual
OPPO Digital DVD Player OPDV971H User Manual
Palsonic Flat Panel Television TFTV663R User Manual
Patton electronic Network Router 3087 User Manual